mirror of
https://github.com/elliotnunn/supermario.git
synced 2024-10-30 23:26:05 +00:00
6733 lines
228 KiB
C
6733 lines
228 KiB
C
|
/*
|
||
|
File: IconUtils.c
|
||
|
|
||
|
Contains: C laguage portions of color icon plotting utilities
|
||
|
|
||
|
Written by: David Collins
|
||
|
|
||
|
Copyright: © 1990-1992 by Apple Computer, Inc., all rights reserved.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Change History (most recent first):
|
||
|
|
||
|
<SM7> 12/3/92 RB Renamed GetClut to IconGetClut to avoid a conflict.
|
||
|
<78> 11/24/92 KSM Fix ROMMapInsert setting in CubeE version (77+74 problem).
|
||
|
<77> 11/23/92 DTY Make the CubeE part of this file build too.
|
||
|
<76> 11/13/92 JDR Updated QuickDraw.h to not use the dangerous pattern type.
|
||
|
<75> 10/26/92 DTY Replace explicit references to ExpandMem globals with macro API.
|
||
|
<74> 9/03/92 JDR Changed noMaskFound to noMaskFoundErr. Removed private inline
|
||
|
version of myGetHandleSize, which must be glue because the
|
||
|
Memory Manager may return MemErr in D0. Removed a duplicate
|
||
|
define for RomMapInsert. Removed private inline to NewGestalt.
|
||
|
<73> 7/2/92 DC Sigh, rolled back the cool changes I made to the 7.0 versions of
|
||
|
IconUtils because the fix I made makes Finder Printing work
|
||
|
differently.
|
||
|
<72> 7/1/92 DC #1032893 <csd>: Changed the onScreen field of the ParamBlock
|
||
|
structure to useCopyMask. The flag is now true if the current
|
||
|
port has user-defined bottlenecks or is recording to a PICT. No
|
||
|
longer overload this flag to mean "always plot 8-bits to a color
|
||
|
port". The world is now safe for Tsunami and the bug is fixed.
|
||
|
<71> 6/5/92 DC Added registry of the Gestalt selector. (conditionalized for
|
||
|
theFuture)
|
||
|
<70> 3/20/92 DC Added UpdateIconGlobals to reinitialize the icon globals in
|
||
|
response to dynamic changes in the make up of the device list.
|
||
|
Used GetExpandMem to replace the GetGlobalPtr.
|
||
|
<69> 3/19/92 DC Changed references to printerPortCache in the globalIconData
|
||
|
structure to a separate ExpandMem reference.
|
||
|
<68> 10/29/91 DC Rolled out all post-7.0 changes by one huge conditional for
|
||
|
Cube-E.
|
||
|
<67> 8/30/91 DC Changed globals from a handle to a ptr (makes code more readable
|
||
|
and avoids locking and unlocking). Changed the way printing is
|
||
|
detected to avoid screen plotting problems during background
|
||
|
printing. Fixed maskRgn to scale back the region to a rectangle
|
||
|
under low memory conditions.
|
||
|
<66> 8/28/91 DC changed name of ParamBlock to IconParamBlock to avoid confusion
|
||
|
with HFS, fixed problem with alignment of shrunken icons. Fixed
|
||
|
end condition in ApplyPattern loop.
|
||
|
<65> 7/15/91 dba get rid of MemErr, TheGDevice, and fixed up the ShortMul and
|
||
|
ShortDiv functions
|
||
|
<64> 3/11/91 DC sad, #84447: took out conditionalization so that the bug fix
|
||
|
will go into 7.0
|
||
|
<63> 3/7/91 DC ngk, #84447: completely factored out 4-bit selection from 4-bit
|
||
|
labeling in MakeClut. Conditionalized with forPost70
|
||
|
<62> 3/5/91 DC csd,#84160: Fixed memory moves in the middle of purging icon
|
||
|
cluts in SetLabel
|
||
|
<61> 2/27/91 DC dba,#DCC004: Icon cluts made purgeable when built as opposed to
|
||
|
when the purged handles are created
|
||
|
<60> 2/22/91 DC dba - added initials and bug number reference: worksheet number
|
||
|
DCC003
|
||
|
<59> 2/21/91 DC Changed transform and hit-test code to use offscreen bitmaps
|
||
|
instead of region operations. Fixed IconToRgn type code to use
|
||
|
less stack space.
|
||
|
<58> 1/30/91 DC KSM - Fixed Memory moving bug in DoTransform
|
||
|
<57> 1/19/91 DC KSM - In the case of an SICN without a mask (where I synthesize
|
||
|
one) the wrong rowBytes is used on the data when generating a
|
||
|
boundary rectangle. The fix is to use maskMap.baseAddr as the
|
||
|
source data for boundary generation.
|
||
|
<56> 1/16/91 DC Fix Greg and Kip's previous fix to my potential divide-by-zero
|
||
|
error
|
||
|
<55> 1/14/91 KIP <gbm> Fix greg's boneheaded mistake.
|
||
|
<54> 1/14/91 DC KSM - Minor performance shore-ups to improve Finder behavior on
|
||
|
Plus's and SE's
|
||
|
<53> 1/11/91 DC KSM - Fixed 2 bugs in PlotCIconHandle which prevented correct
|
||
|
drawing of CIcons with no one-bit data (which is legal) and/or
|
||
|
pixel values outside the range of specified clut entries (also
|
||
|
legal)
|
||
|
<52> 12/14/90 DC KSM - Use true grays wherever possible in 2-bit mode
|
||
|
<51> 12/13/90 ngk need to include PalettesPriv to get CheckColors (used to be in
|
||
|
Palettes)
|
||
|
<50> 12/6/90 DC ngk - Change one bit to color plots to use darken when plotting
|
||
|
labeled icons. Rolled some color back into 4-bits. (Went a
|
||
|
little overboard on change <47>)
|
||
|
<49> 11/29/90 DC ngk - Fix the crashing bug when a mask with no data is present.
|
||
|
<48> 11/27/90 DC KSM - Create some routines needed for menu manager
|
||
|
<47> 10/30/90 DC ngk - Fix labeling algorithm to look good in 4-bits and
|
||
|
gray-scale (if I can)
|
||
|
<46> 10/24/90 DC VL - Add a routine to brighten colors before using them to tint
|
||
|
labeled icons. Rewrite Darken() to be correct and faster.
|
||
|
Changed MakeClut to cause all colors in a clut to be disabled,
|
||
|
rather than just Paulien's colors.
|
||
|
<45> 10/21/90 gbm (with dba) Made compatible with 3.2 C compiler (and incompatible
|
||
|
with previous compilers).
|
||
|
<45> 10/2/90 JAL Changing #pragmas to 3.2 version.
|
||
|
<44> 9/25/90 DC Made two fixes for revision 42. One fixed a bug with saving and
|
||
|
restoring handle states which caused a locked handle not to
|
||
|
plot. This was stopping Alex Kazim. This change was reviewed by
|
||
|
Scott Boyd. The other was a minor change to the way black and
|
||
|
white systems plotted non-transformed icons in an attempt to
|
||
|
boost performance on the plus and SE. This change was refined in
|
||
|
in revision 43, but time-tests showed that it was not a win.
|
||
|
This revision rolls out the change to the black and white draw,
|
||
|
but keeps the necessary change to the way icon handle states are
|
||
|
saved and restored (by merging 42 with 41)
|
||
|
<43> 9/24/90 DC Fixing plotting to Black and White Macs that I broke on my last
|
||
|
fix.
|
||
|
<42> 9/23/90 DC <ngk> Fixed bug with get and SetState using sign extended data
|
||
|
<41> 9/21/90 DC <ksm>Fixed clip region bug.
|
||
|
<40> 9/15/90 DC Rewrote callbacks as assembly, used GetGray in one-bit color
|
||
|
disabled case
|
||
|
<39> 9/15/90 csd Removed the declaration of DeviceLoop and fixed the call to
|
||
|
match the interfaces.
|
||
|
<38> 9/10/90 DC Fixed minor bug in 1-bit color quickdraw opened case
|
||
|
<37> 9/7/90 DC Fix up appearance of disabled state
|
||
|
<36> 9/6/90 JSM SetLabel was setting the length of the string one too many.
|
||
|
<35> 9/6/90 DC Merge in new labeling/darkening algorithm
|
||
|
<34> 9/1/90 dvb Add CIconToIconSuite routine
|
||
|
<33> 8/29/90 DC allow one-bit versions without masks. I.e. ICON
|
||
|
<32> 8/22/90 DC fixed some low-memory condition bugs
|
||
|
<31> 8/9/90 DC Fixed to prevent hanging in icons that have a mask with empty
|
||
|
data
|
||
|
<30> 8/7/90 DC Temporary fix for bug that caused icons not to plot in low
|
||
|
memory conditions
|
||
|
<29> 8/6/90 DC added a true gray disabled state for black and white icons on
|
||
|
color systems (will not degrade correctly yet)
|
||
|
<28> 8/2/90 DC Changed the transfer mode in CopyBits in Render() from srcCopy
|
||
|
to srcOr (makes 'PICT''s look better)
|
||
|
<27> 7/26/90 DC Fixed some dumb bugs that caused malfunction
|
||
|
<26> 7/25/90 DC Converted some routines to assembly language for efficiency
|
||
|
<25> 7/23/90 DC Added CheckColors, fixed black and white transforms
|
||
|
<24> 7/13/90 dba fixed C warnings
|
||
|
<23> 7/12/90 DC Fixed bug in 4-bit mode. Added support for printing and
|
||
|
offscreen cases. Started to add support for graceful
|
||
|
degradation.
|
||
|
<22> 7/5/90 DC Added hit-testing and region-producing
|
||
|
<21> 6/29/90 DC Fix bad resolution values in SetUpPixMap. Added set up of
|
||
|
global data and colorized labeling.
|
||
|
<20> 6/15/90 DC Get my cluts from a global now (although its none of your
|
||
|
business where I get my cluts from)
|
||
|
<19> 6/13/90 DC Fixed 4-bit clut in MakeIconData
|
||
|
<18> 6/13/90 DC Added MakeIconData and associated types
|
||
|
<17> 6/7/90 ngk auto-include quickdraw
|
||
|
<16> 5/31/90 DC Make some fixes to icon itteration
|
||
|
<15> 5/30/90 DC Removed DisposeIconCache and changed name of interface from
|
||
|
IconUtils.h to Icons.h
|
||
|
<14> 5/22/90 DC Made IconCache a subclass of IconSuite.
|
||
|
<13> 5/9/90 DC Use srcOr mode in stead of transparent mode in color plotting
|
||
|
(faster, more correct)
|
||
|
<12> 5/8/90 DC Fixed alignment problem in icon caches. improved efficiency of
|
||
|
loading heuristic
|
||
|
<11> 5/4/90 DC Added many new routines NewIconSuite, ForEachIconDo, etc.
|
||
|
<10> 4/18/90 DC Use typeTable to map IconType values to corresponding ResType
|
||
|
<9> 4/18/90 DC Fixed drawing in 4-bits and small size
|
||
|
<7> 4/11/90 DC Changed for interface fixes
|
||
|
<6> 4/10/90 DC Fixed bug in ploticoncache - might crash if no icon was
|
||
|
available
|
||
|
<5> 4/10/90 DC Merged PlotIconCache and PlotIconSuite into one routine -
|
||
|
PlotBestIcon
|
||
|
<4> 4/9/90 DC IconCache stuff now is working - isn't life strange and
|
||
|
wonderful
|
||
|
<1> 4/7/90 DC first checked in - IconCache stuff not yet working
|
||
|
|
||
|
To Do:
|
||
|
*/
|
||
|
|
||
|
// this is a big conditional used to protect Cube-E from all my post-7.0 changes. I thought
|
||
|
// this was the safest way to roll back completely to 7.0. The code in the else clause of this
|
||
|
// conditional is the entirety (minus header comments) of version 64 of IconUtils.c, which is
|
||
|
// the version that went into 7.0 final.
|
||
|
|
||
|
#if TheFuture
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __ICONS__
|
||
|
#include <Icons.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __EXPANDMEMPRIV__
|
||
|
#include <ExpandMemPriv.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __ERRORS__
|
||
|
#include <Errors.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __QUICKDRAW__
|
||
|
#include <QuickDraw.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __PALETTES__
|
||
|
#include <Palettes.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#include <IconUtilsPriv.h>
|
||
|
#include <PalettesPriv.h>
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __MEMORY__
|
||
|
#include <Memory.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __RESOURCES__
|
||
|
#include <Resources.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __TRAPS__
|
||
|
#include <Traps.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __SYSEQU__
|
||
|
#include <SysEqu.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __OSUTILS__
|
||
|
#include <OSUtils.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __QDOFFSCREEN__
|
||
|
#include <QDOffScreen.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __GESTALTEQU__
|
||
|
#include <GestaltEqu.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
GrafPtr myGetPort() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x2255, // MOVEA.L (A5), A1 ; Get Pointer to globals
|
||
|
0x2011 // MOVE.L (A1), D0 ; Return current grafport
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
ConstPatternParam GetBlack() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x70F0, // MOVEQ.L black, D0
|
||
|
0xD095 // ADD.L GrafGlobals(A5), D0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
ConstPatternParam GetHalfGray() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x70E8, // MOVEQ.L gray, D0
|
||
|
0xD095 // ADD.L GrafGlobals(A5), D0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
ConstPatternParam GetLightGray() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x70E0, // MOVEQ.L ltGray, D0
|
||
|
0xD095 // ADD.L GrafGlobals(A5), D0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define ResErr (*((short *)0xA60))
|
||
|
#define DeviceList (*((GDHandle *)0x8A8))
|
||
|
#define MainDevice (*((GDHandle *)0x8A4))
|
||
|
#define ROM85 (*(unsigned short *) 0x28E)
|
||
|
#define HaveCQD() (ROM85 <= 0x3fff)
|
||
|
|
||
|
// These are machine language multiply and divide routines, which are
|
||
|
// used to avoid using CRuntime.o
|
||
|
|
||
|
#pragma parameter __D0 ShortMul(__D1, __D0)
|
||
|
long ShortMul(short, short)
|
||
|
= 0xC1C1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
#pragma parameter __D0 ShortDiv(__D0, __D1)
|
||
|
short ShortDiv(short, short)
|
||
|
= 0x81C1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define MakeLong(aThing) (*((long *)(&(aThing))))
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This external table is defined in IconUtils.a
|
||
|
|
||
|
extern ResType typeTable[IconSpace];
|
||
|
|
||
|
// typedef for call-back used internally for routines like PlotIconGeneric, HitTestIconGeneric, etc.
|
||
|
typedef Handle (*IconRetriever)(long data, IconType theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the folowing is the definition of the parameter block used throughout the code
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
PixMap dataMap; // PixMap (or BitMap) structure used for icon image data
|
||
|
BitMap maskMap; // BitMap used for icon mask data
|
||
|
BitMapPtr dstMap; // Pointer to the destination BitMap
|
||
|
Handle theMask, // Handle to one-bit data (usually with mask appended)
|
||
|
theData; // Handle to 4 or 8 bit icon image data
|
||
|
Rect theRect, // destination rectangle (as modified by alignment)
|
||
|
boundary; // boundary of non-zero data within the maskMap bounds.
|
||
|
short rowBytes; // basic rowBytes of data (2 or 4)
|
||
|
unsigned short theTransform, // transform broken out from transform code
|
||
|
theLabel, // label broken out from transform code
|
||
|
selected, // selected state broken out from transform code
|
||
|
dontDraw, // flag which is set to true for LoadIconCache, cuts operation short before drawing
|
||
|
useCopyMask, // true if the icon does not need to go through bottlenecks.
|
||
|
screenDepth, // used to record the depth of the device we'll be drawing to
|
||
|
dataDepth, // used to record the depth of the data we'll be drawing
|
||
|
clutNumber; // index into an array of CTabHandles, specifies CLUT we will use with dataMap
|
||
|
Boolean useRegions; // true if we will use regions to perform transforms, false normally
|
||
|
IconType theGroup; // size category of icon we are using (mini, small or large) also used to indicate a cicn
|
||
|
long userData; // data for icon-data-getting call back
|
||
|
IconRetriever userProc; // ProcPtr to icon-data-getting call back
|
||
|
CTabHandle theClut; // handle to CLUT we will use with dataMap
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice; // device we are currently drawing to or NULL if black and white or if single device
|
||
|
unsigned long maskBuffer[32]; // buffer in which we store masks we create for one reason or another
|
||
|
} IconParamBlock;
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define HorizontalCodes 0xC // mask for horizontal positioning codes
|
||
|
#define VerticalCodes 0x3 // mask for vertical positioning codes
|
||
|
|
||
|
short DivByTwoShort(short theValue)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theValue < 0)
|
||
|
++theValue;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theValue >>= 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return theValue;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PerformAlignment offsets theBlock->theRect to cause the icon to have the alignment specified by the caller
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PerformAlignment(IconParamBlock *theBlock, short align)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short offsetx,
|
||
|
offsety;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Rect *theRect = &(theBlock->theRect),
|
||
|
theBoundary = theBlock->boundary;
|
||
|
|
||
|
MapRect(&theBoundary, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), theRect);
|
||
|
|
||
|
switch (align & HorizontalCodes)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
case atHorizontalCenter:
|
||
|
offsetx = DivByTwoShort((theRect->right + theRect->left) - (theBoundary.right + theBoundary.left));
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atLeft:
|
||
|
offsetx = theRect->left - theBoundary.left;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atRight:
|
||
|
offsetx = theRect->right - theBoundary.right;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
default:
|
||
|
offsetx = 0;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
switch (align & VerticalCodes)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
case atVerticalCenter:
|
||
|
offsety = DivByTwoShort((theRect->bottom + theRect->top) - (theBoundary.bottom + theBoundary.top));
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atTop:
|
||
|
offsety = theRect->top - theBoundary.top;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atBottom:
|
||
|
offsety = theRect->bottom - theBoundary.bottom;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
default:
|
||
|
offsety = 0;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
OffsetRect(theRect, offsetx, offsety);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following routines are used to create regions from mask BitMap's for IconToRgn-type calls and
|
||
|
// for hit-testing and transforms when an icon is draw larger than 32-bits. They are faster than the
|
||
|
// more general BitMapRgn code because they are optimized for a bitMap no greater that a longword in
|
||
|
// width.
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define TempRgnBufferSize 100
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal Boolean AddBufferToRgn(RgnHandle theRgn, unsigned short *rgnBuffer, unsigned short *regionPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long incrementSize = (unsigned long)regionPtr - (unsigned long)rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
short rgnSize = (*theRgn)->rgnSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetHandleSize((Handle)theRgn, rgnSize + incrementSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (MemError() != noErr)
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)rgnBuffer, (Ptr)(((unsigned char *)(*theRgn)) + rgnSize), incrementSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnSize += incrementSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void MaskRgn(RgnHandle theRgn,
|
||
|
IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char *data = theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr; // This may or may not be locked down
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned short rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes,
|
||
|
rowIndex,
|
||
|
rgnBuffer[TempRgnBufferSize],
|
||
|
*regionPtr = rgnBuffer,
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long sizeMask = (rowBytes > 2) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 0xFFFF0000,
|
||
|
lastRow = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// initialize output region
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnSize = sizeof(Region);
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnBBox = theBlock->boundary;
|
||
|
|
||
|
data += ShortMul(rowBytes, theBlock->boundary.top); // Point to the top of real data
|
||
|
|
||
|
// find the inversion points row-by-row
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (rowIndex = theBlock->boundary.top;
|
||
|
rowIndex <= theBlock->boundary.bottom;
|
||
|
++rowIndex, data += rowBytes)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long thisRow,
|
||
|
inversion;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (rowIndex != theBlock->boundary.bottom)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
thisRow = *((unsigned long *)data);
|
||
|
inversion = thisRow ^ lastRow; // inversion is a bit-map difference between this row and the last
|
||
|
lastRow = thisRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
inversion = lastRow; // To finish the region, we compare the last row to nothing (all zeros)
|
||
|
|
||
|
inversion &= sizeMask; // Take only the significant data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is any difference between this row and the last, we describe this difference as a set of inversion points
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (inversion)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short columnIndex = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// I'm about to add two words to the region (the row index and the first column index, so I make one check to see
|
||
|
// if I've got two words left in my buffer. If I don't, I dump my temporary buffer to the output region and free
|
||
|
// up the temp buffer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (spaceLeftInBuffer < 2)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = rowIndex;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// find the first inversion point (may be the first point in the row)
|
||
|
|
||
|
while (!(inversion & 0x80000000))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
++columnIndex;
|
||
|
inversion <<= 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// record the first inversion point.
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = columnIndex++;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// update our gas guage.
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer -= 2;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// find and record all subsequent inversion points
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long check = inversion & 0xC0000000;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (check && (check != 0xC0000000))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// check if I need to flush my temp buffer
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!spaceLeftInBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = columnIndex;
|
||
|
--spaceLeftInBuffer;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
columnIndex++;
|
||
|
inversion <<= 1;
|
||
|
} while (inversion);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// cap off the row with a row-capping marker.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!spaceLeftInBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = 0x7FFF;
|
||
|
--spaceLeftInBuffer;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!spaceLeftInBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = 0x7FFF; // cap off the rgn
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the region is purely rectangular, minimize it and return it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((*theRgn)->rgnSize == sizeof(Region)) &&
|
||
|
(((unsigned long)regionPtr - (unsigned long)rgnBuffer) == 18) &&
|
||
|
(rgnBuffer[1] == rgnBuffer[5]) &&
|
||
|
(rgnBuffer[2] == rgnBuffer[6]))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
SetHandleSize((Handle)theRgn, sizeof(Region));
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Flush the remainder of the buffer to the region.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
error:
|
||
|
// This handle had to be at least sizeof(Region) to start with and the error occurred
|
||
|
// white trying to size it up. Therefore, SetHandleSize to sizeof(Region) can only
|
||
|
// be sizing it down or leaving it unchanged. It should always work.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetHandleSize((Handle)theRgn, sizeof(Region));
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnSize = sizeof(Region);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
// Search utilities.
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
|
||
|
// GetBestData finds the best available data that is appropriate for the destination device.
|
||
|
// Initially, theBlock->dataDepth is set equal to the screen depth (by SetUpParamBlock). On
|
||
|
// exit, theData is set to the best available color data, theClut is set to the appropriate
|
||
|
// CLUT to use, and dataDepth is updated to reflect the depth of the output data. If no color
|
||
|
// data is available or appropriate, theData and theClut are set NULL and dataDepth is set to 1,
|
||
|
// all of which means that this is a one-bit plot. GetClut calls CheckClut to see if the clut
|
||
|
// of the specified depth fits into the current color environments. It returns false if it is not,
|
||
|
// causing us to degrade to a smaller bit-depth.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void GetBestData(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long theData = theBlock->userData,
|
||
|
IconGetClut(IconParamBlock *, short);
|
||
|
|
||
|
short checkDepth = 8,
|
||
|
whichIcon = theBlock->theGroup + largeIcon8; // whichIcon is initialized to the code
|
||
|
// for the deepest data in our size group
|
||
|
|
||
|
long IconGetClut(IconParamBlock *, short);
|
||
|
|
||
|
IconRetriever theProc = theBlock->userProc;
|
||
|
void MakeClut(IconParamBlock *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if ((theBlock->dataDepth >= checkDepth)
|
||
|
&& IconGetClut(theBlock, checkDepth)
|
||
|
&& (theBlock->theData = (*theProc)(theData, whichIcon)))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = checkDepth;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the the clut returned by IconGetClut is purged, build a new one
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(*(theBlock->theClut)))
|
||
|
MakeClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
checkDepth -= 4;
|
||
|
--whichIcon;
|
||
|
} while (checkDepth);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = 1;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// ChooseBestSize maps a destination rectangle size to an icon size category.
|
||
|
|
||
|
short ChooseBestSize(const Rect *theRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
int width = theRect->right - theRect->left,
|
||
|
height = theRect->bottom - theRect->top;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((width >= 32) || (height >= 32))
|
||
|
return largeIcon1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (height > 12)
|
||
|
return smallIcon1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return miniIcon1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define FIXED(a) (long)(((a)<<16))
|
||
|
#define THEPIXMAP ((PixMapPtr)theBlock) // only works if the pixmap is the first element
|
||
|
|
||
|
// SetUpPixMap initializes the necessary fields of dataMap for a color plot.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void SetUpPixMap(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned short depth = theBlock->dataDepth;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->baseAddr = *(theBlock->theData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we use the pixelSize field to indicate whether or not we already have the dataMap
|
||
|
// initialized for a color plot, and if so to what depth.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (THEPIXMAP->pixelSize == depth)
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pmVersion = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->packType = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->packSize = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->hRes = FIXED(72);
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->vRes = FIXED(72);
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pixelType = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->cmpCount = 1;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->planeBytes = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pixelSize = depth;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->cmpSize = depth;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the icon is a true CIcon, the rowBytes could be any arbitrary value. Otherwise,
|
||
|
// we can calculate the proper PixMap rowBytes value from the basic rowBytes and the
|
||
|
// depth.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theGroup != aCIcon)
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->rowBytes = ShortMul(theBlock->rowBytes, depth) | 0x8000;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->rowBytes = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pmTable = theBlock->theClut;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
// IconSuite Manipulation routines.
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __NewIconSuite is called directly by the dispatcher to implement the NewIconSuite call.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __NewIconSuite(IconSuiteHandle *theSuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*theSuite = (IconSuiteHandle)NewHandleClear(sizeof(IconSuite));
|
||
|
return MemError();
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __MakeIconCache is called directly by the dispatcher to implement the MakeIconCache call.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __MakeIconCache(IconCacheHandle *theHandle,
|
||
|
IconGetter makeIcon,
|
||
|
void *yourDataPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconCacheHandle theCache;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(theCache = (IconCacheHandle)NewHandleClear(sizeof(IconCache))))
|
||
|
return MemError();
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*theCache)->theSuite.type = CACHE; // set the suite type to indicate that this is a cache
|
||
|
(*theCache)->userPtr = yourDataPtr; // install the call-back and the data.
|
||
|
(*theCache)->userMethod = makeIcon;
|
||
|
|
||
|
*theHandle = theCache;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// EditIconSuite is called by __AddIconToSuite and __GetIconFromSuite (defined in IconUtils.a)
|
||
|
// If isAdd is false, EditIconSuite assumes refCon is a pointer to a Handle and returns the
|
||
|
// entry of type theType from theSuite (possibly NULL). If isAdd is true, the value in refcon
|
||
|
// is added to theSuite in the slot for data of type theType.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr EditIconSuite(long refCon, // Handle or referenct to handle of icon data
|
||
|
IconSuiteHandle theSuite,
|
||
|
ResType theType,
|
||
|
long isAdd)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Handle *theSlot = (*theSuite)->table;
|
||
|
long theEnd = (long)(theSlot + IconSpace);
|
||
|
ResType *theTable = typeTable;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theType == *theTable++)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (isAdd)
|
||
|
*theSlot = (Handle)refCon;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
*((Handle *)refCon) = *theSlot;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
} while ((long)(++theSlot) < theEnd);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __ForEachIconDo is called by the trap dispatcher to implement the ForEachIconDo call. The action
|
||
|
// call-back is called for every member of theSuite specified by selector (See ERS for selector values).
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __ForEachIconDo(IconSuiteHandle theSuite,
|
||
|
unsigned long selector,
|
||
|
IconAction action,
|
||
|
void *yourDataPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Handle *theTable = (Handle *)((*theSuite)->table);
|
||
|
long end = (long)(theTable + IconSpace); // there are more data registers than address
|
||
|
ResType *theTypes = typeTable;
|
||
|
OSErr rval = noErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
char theState = HGetState((Handle)theSuite);
|
||
|
HLock((Handle) theSuite);
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short i = IconSizeSpace;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (selector & 0x00000001)
|
||
|
if (rval = (*action)(*theTypes, theTable, yourDataPtr))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theTable++;
|
||
|
theTypes++;
|
||
|
selector >>= 1;
|
||
|
} while (--i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
selector >>= (8 - IconSizeSpace);
|
||
|
} while (theTable < (Handle *)end);
|
||
|
|
||
|
out:
|
||
|
HSetState((Handle) theSuite, theState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the call back used with ForEachIconDo to implement the __GetIconSuite
|
||
|
// call below. A more sophisticated call-back could be used to implement a
|
||
|
// Get1IconSuite or to ensure that GetIconSuite only got icons from a single
|
||
|
// file. A user could do this kind of thing by rewriting GetIconSuite with
|
||
|
// their own call-back.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr GetIconFromResource(ResType theType, Handle *theIcon, void *yourDataPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*theIcon = GetResource(theType, (short)yourDataPtr);
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the GetIconSuite call. The selector allows only specific members of the
|
||
|
// suite to be asked for.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __GetIconSuite(Handle *theHandle, short theID, unsigned long selector)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (__NewIconSuite((IconSuiteHandle *)theHandle))
|
||
|
return MemError();
|
||
|
|
||
|
__ForEachIconDo((IconSuiteHandle)(*theHandle), selector, GetIconFromResource, (void *)theID);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the SetSuiteLabel call. This specifies a default label for a suite
|
||
|
// which is used if no label is specified by the transform. Yes, this is currently used.
|
||
|
// Namely, by the process manager for the Apple Menu.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __SetSuiteLabel(IconSuiteHandle theSuite, unsigned short theLabel)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theLabel > 7)
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theLabel <<= labelShift;
|
||
|
(*theSuite)->label = theLabel;
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the GetSuiteLabel. Just for completeness.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal short __GetSuiteLabel(IconSuiteHandle theSuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
return (((*theSuite)->label) >> labelShift);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the call back used with ForEachIconDo to implement DisposIconSuite. An icon
|
||
|
// is only disposed if it is not a resource.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr Disposer(ResType , Handle *theIcon, void *)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (*theIcon && (HomeResFile(*theIcon) == -1))
|
||
|
DisposHandle(*theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
*theIcon = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the DisposeIconSuite call. disposeData indicates whether an attempt should
|
||
|
// be made to dispose of the data in the suite. Only non-resource handles will be disposed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __DisposeIconSuite(IconSuiteHandle theSuite, Boolean disposeData)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (disposeData)
|
||
|
(void)__ForEachIconDo(theSuite, svAllAvailableData, Disposer, NULL);
|
||
|
|
||
|
DisposHandle((Handle)theSuite);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return MemError();
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// These are the call-backs used with all the generic routines (PlotIconGeneric, HitTestIconGeneric and
|
||
|
// IconToRgnGeneric) to implement PlotIconID, PlotIconMethod, PlotIconSuite, HitTestIconID, etc. etc.
|
||
|
// FromMethod and FromResource are defined in IconUtils.a
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromMethod(long data, IconType theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromResource(long data, IconType theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromSuite(long data, IconType theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconCachePtr theCache = *((IconCacheHandle)data);
|
||
|
Handle rval = theCache->theSuite.table[theIcon];
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if a suite is a cache (See Cache routines below) and we don't have any data, we call the user's
|
||
|
// call back to get some data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!rval && theCache->theSuite.type)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconGetter theProc = theCache->userMethod;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theProc)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rval = (*theProc)(typeTable[theIcon], theCache->userPtr);
|
||
|
(*((IconSuiteHandle)data))->table[theIcon] = rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// AdjustRgn checks the from and to rects and decides whether the region needs mapping,
|
||
|
// offsetting or nothing. It is defined in IconUtils.a and is called by DoRegionTransform
|
||
|
// and HitTestIconGeneric.
|
||
|
|
||
|
extern pascal void AdjustRgn(RgnHandle maskRgn, Rect *from, Rect *to);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// DoRegionTransform performs a transform using region operations. This will be called
|
||
|
// when the useRegions flag is true.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void DoRegionTransform(IconParamBlock *theBlock, short theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RgnHandle patRgn;
|
||
|
Boolean isASuite = (theBlock->theGroup != aCIcon);
|
||
|
PenState saveState;
|
||
|
char maskState;
|
||
|
|
||
|
GetPenState(&saveState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we are not a true CIcon, we need to generate a region from the icon mask. The
|
||
|
// locking of theMask is redundant in the color case and extraneous in the case where
|
||
|
// we synthesize a mask but the complexity of determining exactly whether it needs to be done
|
||
|
// dosen't buy that much.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (isASuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
maskState = HGetState(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
HLock(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
patRgn = NewRgn();
|
||
|
MaskRgn(patRgn, theBlock);
|
||
|
AdjustRgn(patRgn, &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), &(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
patRgn = (RgnHandle)theBlock->userData; // This is used for true CIcon to hold a region equivalent
|
||
|
// to its mask (See SetupParamBlockForCIcon)
|
||
|
switch (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// makes an outline and fills it with a 25% gray pattern
|
||
|
|
||
|
case ttOpen:
|
||
|
FillRgn(patRgn, GetBlack());
|
||
|
InsetRgn(patRgn, 1, 1);
|
||
|
FillRgn(patRgn, GetLightGray());
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Or's over the data (already drawn) with a 25% gray pattern
|
||
|
|
||
|
case ttOffline:
|
||
|
PenPat(GetLightGray());
|
||
|
PenMode(patOr);
|
||
|
PaintRgn(patRgn);
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Bit-clears the already drawn data with a 50% pattern
|
||
|
|
||
|
case ttDisabled:
|
||
|
PenPat(GetHalfGray());
|
||
|
PenMode(patBic);
|
||
|
PaintRgn(patRgn);
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetPenState(&saveState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (isASuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
DisposeRgn(patRgn);
|
||
|
HSetState(theBlock->theMask, maskState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following routines are used by DoBitMapTransform to accomplish the various
|
||
|
// transform effects. They rely on the fact that the theBlock->maskMap describes
|
||
|
// exactly the countours of the shape they are transforming. This is guaranteed
|
||
|
// by PrescaleMask (See below)
|
||
|
|
||
|
// DoOutline takes the pre-scaled maskMap and OR's an outline of the icon
|
||
|
// over destination. It is used to implement the open transform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void DoOutline(BitMapPtr maskMap, unsigned long *destination)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char *source = (unsigned char *)(maskMap->baseAddr);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long dataMask = (unsigned long)(-1),
|
||
|
lastRow,
|
||
|
row,
|
||
|
nextRow,
|
||
|
destRow,
|
||
|
checkRow,
|
||
|
setMask;
|
||
|
|
||
|
short end = maskMap->bounds.bottom - 1,
|
||
|
i;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// data mask is used to mask off all but the bits belonging to one row of the mask map.
|
||
|
|
||
|
dataMask <<= (32 - maskMap->bounds.right);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// last row represents the row of mask data above the one we're analyzing. It is initialized
|
||
|
// to zero because logicly, there are zero bits outside the bounds of our maskMap.
|
||
|
|
||
|
lastRow = 0L;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// row is the row of mask data we are currently trying to hollow out.
|
||
|
|
||
|
row = *((unsigned long *)source) & dataMask;
|
||
|
source += maskMap->rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we march through the rows of our mask, hollowing our rows as we go. We only go as far
|
||
|
// as the row before the bottom-most row, since we are only interested in examining rows
|
||
|
// that are samwiched between other rows with data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 0; i < end; i++)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// destRow will be our hollowed out row. It is initialized to row since we don't know if it
|
||
|
// needs hollowing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
destRow = row;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// nextRow is the row below the one we are examining. We advance our source pointer here. We
|
||
|
// won't be advancing off the icon because we're stopping one row before the last.
|
||
|
|
||
|
nextRow = *((unsigned long *)source) & dataMask;
|
||
|
source += maskMap->rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if row has data above and below it, we examine its bits left-to-right. If any one bit has
|
||
|
// a one-bit to left of it, to the right of it, on top of it and below it, we turn that bit
|
||
|
// off in destRow. It works, really.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (destRow)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (lastRow && nextRow)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
setMask = 0x40000000;
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (checkRow = row; checkRow; checkRow <<= 1, setMask >>= 1)
|
||
|
if (((checkRow & 0xE0000000) == 0xE0000000) && (setMask & lastRow) && (setMask & nextRow))
|
||
|
destRow ^= setMask;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// here we OR the destRow with the destination data
|
||
|
|
||
|
*destination |= destRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// advance the destination pointer as well as lastRow and row.
|
||
|
|
||
|
++destination;
|
||
|
lastRow = row;
|
||
|
row = nextRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// nextRow now contains the data from the last row in the icon. It either has data, in which case
|
||
|
// it gets OR'd in its entirety, or it dosen't and we do nothing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (nextRow)
|
||
|
*destination |= nextRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// ApplyPattern is used to either bitClear the data in theMap with a 50% pattern (for the disabled transform)
|
||
|
// or to OR the data with a 25% pattern (for offline and open).
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void ApplyPattern(BitMapPtr theMap, BitMapPtr theMask, Boolean bitClear)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long *mapData = (unsigned long *)(theMap->baseAddr);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned char *maskData = (unsigned char *)(theMask->baseAddr); // we know how wide this buffer is
|
||
|
short rowBytes = theMask->rowBytes,
|
||
|
end = theMask->bounds.bottom;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if (bitClear)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*mapData++ &= 0xAAAAAAAA;
|
||
|
*mapData++ &= 0x55555555;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*mapData++ |= (0x88888888 & *((unsigned long *)maskData));
|
||
|
maskData += rowBytes;
|
||
|
*mapData++ |= (0x22222222 & *((unsigned long *)maskData));
|
||
|
maskData += rowBytes;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
end -= 2;
|
||
|
} while (end > 0);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
// DoBitMapTransform causes an icon to appear transformed (open, offline or disabled). If onePass is true,
|
||
|
// It means that we are plotting a one-bit icon and we want to combine the transform patterns with the
|
||
|
// icon data off-screen and plot it all at once. If onePass is false, it means we are plotting a color
|
||
|
// icon and that the color data has already been plotted.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void DoBitMapTransform(IconParamBlock *theBlock, short theTransform, Boolean onePass)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
BitMap transformMap; // BitMap used for transform data.
|
||
|
unsigned long transformBuffer[32], // offscreen area where we will create transform data
|
||
|
*buffPtr = transformBuffer,
|
||
|
*endPtr = buffPtr + 32;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// IsNotPreScaled is true if we did not have to scale the mask prior to this point. We need to know this to decide
|
||
|
// whether to scale the data for one pass attempt and whether we should use CopyMask.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Boolean IsNotPreScaled = (MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom) == MakeLong(theBlock->dataMap.bounds.bottom));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// empty out the transformBuffer, since we are OR'ing data over it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
*buffPtr++ = 0L;
|
||
|
} while (buffPtr < endPtr);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// initialize transform BitMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
transformMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)transformBuffer;
|
||
|
transformMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
transformMap.bounds = theBlock->maskMap.bounds;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we are trying to do this plot in one pass, we copy the one-bit data into the transformBuffer. If the mask has
|
||
|
// not been prescaled, the image data data will not need scaling and we can just copy it into the buffer. (this will
|
||
|
// always be the case in the Finder since they prescale their old-style icons into different size categories) Otherwise,
|
||
|
// we will have to stretch the data into transform buffer;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (onePass && (theTransform != ttOpen))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (IsNotPreScaled)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short height = theBlock->dataMap.bounds.bottom;
|
||
|
unsigned char *theData = *(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
buffPtr = transformBuffer;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
*buffPtr++ = *((unsigned long *)theData);
|
||
|
theData += theBlock->rowBytes;
|
||
|
} while (--height);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else // use srcXor because we do not know the foreColor or backColor but we know the destination is all zeros
|
||
|
CopyBits((BitMapPtr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), &transformMap, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), &(transformMap.bounds), srcXor, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// OR in an outline of the mask if the transform is ttOpen
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttOpen)
|
||
|
DoOutline(&(theBlock->maskMap), transformBuffer);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the transform is ttDisabled, bit clear the data with a 50% gray. If it is ttOffline or ttOpen, OR the data with 25% gray
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
ApplyPattern(&transformMap, &(theBlock->maskMap), true);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
ApplyPattern(&transformMap, &(theBlock->maskMap), false);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// I'm putting this in a block to take advantage of register re-use
|
||
|
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Rect *maskRect = &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we're plotting a one-bit, transformed icon or if we're plotting an opened icon, we have all the
|
||
|
// data we need in the transform map and we'll try to render that in one shot (although we may have
|
||
|
// to put down the mask separately. See comments below). Otherwise, we have a color transform and
|
||
|
// we assume that the basic icon data has already been rendered and that we're just going to OR over it
|
||
|
// with our transform pattern.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (onePass || (theTransform == ttOpen))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// The choice of which rendering technique to use is based on three things. If you have don't have color
|
||
|
// QuickDraw, CopyMask dosen't stretch bits so you generally can't use it. If you're printing or plotting
|
||
|
// to an open PICT, again CopyMask won't work. If you're mask is pre-scaled, and therefore has different
|
||
|
// bounds than your data, CopyMask won't work (a bug). In general you want to try to use CopyMask because
|
||
|
// it goes down in one-pass and avoids any possible flashing. If you can't use it, you BitClear the mask
|
||
|
// and OR over it with data, which works regardless of fore and backGround colors.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD() && (theBlock->useCopyMask) && IsNotPreScaled)
|
||
|
CopyMask(&transformMap, &(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
CopyBits(&(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect), srcBic, NULL);
|
||
|
CopyBits(&transformMap, theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect), srcOr, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
CopyBits(&transformMap, theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect), srcOr, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Render is called by PlotDeep, PlotShallowBlackAndWhite and PlotShallowColor. It uses the same criterion described above
|
||
|
// to decide which rendering technique to use with the main icon image data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void Render(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Rect *destRect = &(theBlock->theRect);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD() && (theBlock->useCopyMask) && (MakeLong(theBlock->dataMap.bounds.bottom) == MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom)))
|
||
|
CopyMask((BitMapPtr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), &(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap,
|
||
|
&(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), destRect);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
CopyBits(&(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap, &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), destRect, srcBic, NULL);
|
||
|
CopyBits((BitMapPtr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), theBlock->dstMap, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), destRect, srcOr, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotDeep, PlotShallowBlackAndWhite and PlotShallowColor are all called by PlotTheIcon, once it has been decided what kind of data
|
||
|
// we will be plotting. When these routines are called, theBlock has theDevice, theClut and theData set up. The clipRgn has also been
|
||
|
// set up to whatever extent is necessary.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotDeep is used to plot color data to a deep color screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotDeep(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle theData = theBlock->theData;
|
||
|
short theTransform = theBlock->theTransform;
|
||
|
char dataState;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the CLUT is purgeable and rendering may move memory.
|
||
|
|
||
|
HNoPurge((Handle)(theBlock->theClut));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we've gotten as far as calling PlotDeep we know that there's a good, disabled clut for this screen.
|
||
|
// Setting the local copy theTransform to none indicates that we should not attempt a bit cleared disabled
|
||
|
// transform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
theTransform = ttNone;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if our data is unloaded, we attempt to load it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(*theData))
|
||
|
LoadResource(theData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// lock down the image data because CopyBits or CopyMask may move memory (if only rarely)
|
||
|
|
||
|
dataState = HGetState(theData);
|
||
|
HLock(theData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetUpPixMap(theBlock); // initialize dataMap with additional fields needed for a PixMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Save the color environment
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Ensure black and white for fore and backGround color
|
||
|
|
||
|
ForeColor(blackColor);
|
||
|
BackColor(whiteColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theTransform is ttOpen, the transform code will do all the work. Otherwise, we render
|
||
|
// the main color image.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform != ttOpen)
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there's a transform, we OR or bit clear over the image in an appropriate way.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theBlock->useRegions)
|
||
|
DoRegionTransform(theBlock, theTransform);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DoBitMapTransform(theBlock, theTransform, false);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// restore the color environment
|
||
|
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
HPurge((Handle)(theBlock->dataMap.pmTable));
|
||
|
HSetState(theData, dataState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotShallowBlackAndWhite is used to plot to a one-bit screen (Either a black and white Mac or
|
||
|
// a monitor set to one-bit)
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotShallowBlackAndWhite(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short theTransform = theBlock->theTransform;
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.baseAddr = *(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the icon is selected, we invert the current fore and backGround color
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RGBColor RGBFore,
|
||
|
RGBBack;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
GetForeColor(&RGBFore);
|
||
|
GetBackColor(&RGBBack);
|
||
|
|
||
|
RGBForeColor(&RGBBack);
|
||
|
RGBBackColor(&RGBFore);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GrafPtr curPort = myGetPort();
|
||
|
*((long *)(&foreGround)) = curPort->fgColor;
|
||
|
*((long *)(&backGround)) = curPort->bkColor;
|
||
|
ForeColor(*((long *)(&backGround)));
|
||
|
BackColor(*((long *)(&foreGround)));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we have a transform, use the transform code to render the icon and the transform. Otherwise,
|
||
|
// just render the data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// If we have to use regions to generate the transformed image, render the icon and modify it
|
||
|
// by the transform. Otherwise, do the operation in one pass with DoBitMapTransform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->useRegions)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theTransform != ttOpen)
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
DoRegionTransform(theBlock, theTransform);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DoBitMapTransform(theBlock, theTransform, true);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we mucked with the color environment, restore it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ForeColor(*((long *)(&foreGround)));
|
||
|
BackColor(*((long *)(&backGround)));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotShallowColor is for plotting one-bit data to a deep screen
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotShallowColor(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RGBColor foreColor,
|
||
|
backColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
short screenDepth = theBlock->screenDepth,
|
||
|
theTransform = theBlock->theTransform,
|
||
|
theLabel;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Boolean isDeep = (screenDepth > 4); // Are we deeper than 4-bits?
|
||
|
|
||
|
// this check makes sure that labeling does not happen in gray-scale or in 2-bit mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((screenDepth <= 2) || (theBlock->theDevice && !((*(theBlock->theDevice))->gdFlags & 0x1)))
|
||
|
theLabel = 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
theLabel = theBlock->theLabel;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theLabel)
|
||
|
(void)GetLabel(theLabel, &foreColor, NULL);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
GetForeColor(&foreColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttOpen)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
backColor.red = 52266; // It seems strange to hard-code this color.
|
||
|
backColor.green = 52266; // Should it maybe be function of the label
|
||
|
backColor.blue = 65322; // or some other factor? HMMMM?
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
GetBackColor(&backColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.baseAddr = *(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This check allows for a pure disabled color to be used on a screen that has one.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, a disabled icon will be Bit-Cleared with a 50% pattern. GetGray has
|
||
|
// the side-effect of setting foreColor to the average of backColor and foreColor.
|
||
|
// It returns false if no good average could be found. The condition should read
|
||
|
// something like "If we're on a an 8-bit monitor or we're on a 4-bit monitor and
|
||
|
// there's no label, try to find a disabled color for this icon. If you can find
|
||
|
// one, use that color as the foreground color and treat the icon as not transformed."
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((theTransform == ttDisabled) && (isDeep || (!theLabel)) &&
|
||
|
GetGray(theBlock->theDevice, &backColor, &foreColor))
|
||
|
theTransform = ttNone;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the icon is selected, set up the color environment to make it appear darkened.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
void Darken(RGBColor *aColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// on a four-bit screen, there is almost never an appropriate, darkened color available,
|
||
|
// so we don't try.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (isDeep)
|
||
|
Darken(&foreColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
Darken(&backColor);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Note: There is no guarantee that a good approximation of foreColor and backColor exist
|
||
|
// on the destination device. This is a hole in the whole color protection scheme in this code.
|
||
|
// These colors should probably be validated in some way before they are used, falling back on a
|
||
|
// black & white image.
|
||
|
|
||
|
RGBForeColor(&foreColor);
|
||
|
RGBBackColor(&backColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Use the same criterion as in PlotShallowBlackAndWhite for render the image.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theBlock->useRegions)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theTransform != ttOpen)
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
DoRegionTransform(theBlock, theTransform);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DoBitMapTransform(theBlock, theTransform, true);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This routine simply decides which of the two PlotShallow flavors to use. It exists for
|
||
|
// historical reasons and should be folded into PlotTheIcon in a future version.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotShallow(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.rowBytes = theBlock->rowBytes;
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.pixelSize = 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->screenDepth >= 2)
|
||
|
PlotShallowColor(theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotShallowBlackAndWhite(theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotTheIcon sets up the IconParamBlock for plotting the icon to the particular screen and sets up
|
||
|
// the clip region as appropriate. It is either called directly by PlotIconGeneric or indirectly
|
||
|
// by way of DeviceLoop. On entry, theBlock has been set up by SetupParamBlock, MakeBoundary has
|
||
|
// been called, alignment has been done and the mask has been prescaled if necessary. PlotTheIcon
|
||
|
// gets the best available data for the screen depth and calls one of the plotting routines above
|
||
|
// to render the data with its transform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotTheIcon(short screenDepth,
|
||
|
short flags,
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice,
|
||
|
IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Rect boundRect,
|
||
|
sectRect;
|
||
|
|
||
|
RgnHandle saveClip = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
short theTransform = theBlock->theTransform;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// flags will be non-zero if PlotTheIcon was called from DeviceLoop. Flags will be zero if it
|
||
|
// was called directly from PlotIconGeneric which implies a single target device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theDevice && flags)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// the following code generates a global rectangle which bounds the icon in its destination
|
||
|
// size.
|
||
|
|
||
|
boundRect = theBlock->boundary;
|
||
|
MapRect(&boundRect, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), &(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
LocalToGlobal((Point *)&boundRect);
|
||
|
LocalToGlobal((Point *)(&(boundRect.bottom)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If this global rectangle dosen't intersect the GDevice were checking, then we won't plot to it.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, we will check if it is only partially on the screen. If it is, we will adjust the
|
||
|
// clipRgn so that only the portion of the icon that appears on the screen will be drawn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (SectRect(&((*theDevice)->gdRect), &boundRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if ((!EqualRect(§Rect, &boundRect)) && (!theBlock->dontDraw))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RgnHandle realClip = myGetPort()->clipRgn;
|
||
|
|
||
|
saveClip = NewRgn();
|
||
|
GetClip(saveClip);
|
||
|
GlobalToLocal((Point *)(§Rect));
|
||
|
GlobalToLocal((Point *)(&(sectRect.bottom)));
|
||
|
ClipRect(§Rect);
|
||
|
SectRgn(saveClip, realClip, realClip);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->screenDepth = screenDepth;
|
||
|
theBlock->theDevice = theDevice;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following conditional reads - "try to plot the icon as color if A) we are plotting to an 8-bit
|
||
|
// screen and the transform is not ttOpen or B) we are plotting to a 4-bit screen, the icon is not
|
||
|
// selected, and the transform is neither ttOpen nor ttDisabled. Otherwise, treat it as one-bit"
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((screenDepth > 4) && (theTransform != ttOpen)) ||
|
||
|
((screenDepth == 4) && (!(theBlock->selected)) && (!(theTransform & ttDisabled))))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = screenDepth; // Initialize data depth to screen depth. GetBestData may
|
||
|
GetBestData(theBlock); // change this value.
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = 1;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotTheIcon is being called from LoadIconCache, we're done loading the data and we run away.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->dontDraw)
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->dataDepth >= 4)
|
||
|
PlotDeep(theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotShallow(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (saveClip)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
SetClip(saveClip);
|
||
|
DisposeRgn(saveClip);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// MakeBoundary creates a rectangle within the bounds of the maskMap (before it is pre-scaled) which
|
||
|
// bounds the non-zero bits of the mask. It returns false if the mask is all zeros.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Boolean MakeBoundary(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char *ptr = (unsigned char *)(theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr); // <57>
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned short mark,
|
||
|
side,
|
||
|
rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes,
|
||
|
height = theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom;
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long temp,
|
||
|
checkSum,
|
||
|
sizeMask = (theBlock->rowBytes < 4) ? 0xFFFF0000 : 0xFFFFFFFF;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find the first row that has data and call it the top.
|
||
|
for (side = 0; side < height; ++side, ptr += rowBytes)
|
||
|
if (*((unsigned long *)ptr) & sizeMask)
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If no data in the mask return false
|
||
|
if (side == height)
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.top = side;
|
||
|
|
||
|
checkSum = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// mark is set equal to the row number of the last row with data. checkSum
|
||
|
// is set to the OR of all the rows.
|
||
|
for (; side < height; ++side, ptr += rowBytes)
|
||
|
if (temp = (*((unsigned long *)ptr) & sizeMask))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
mark = side;
|
||
|
checkSum |= temp;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the bottom is equal to the row number of the last row with data plus one.
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.bottom = mark + 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// checkSum is shifted left until the most significant bit is one.
|
||
|
for (side = 0; !(checkSum & 0x80000000); checkSum <<= 1, ++side);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the number of shifts will be the left boundary
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.left = side;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// checkSum is further shifted left until all the data is gone.
|
||
|
for (; checkSum; checkSum <<= 1, ++side);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the number of shifts plus the left offset equals the right boundary.
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.right = side;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CreateMask generates a mask from some data. It is generated into a buffer
|
||
|
// at the end of theBlock. CalcMask is used to generate the data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void CreateMask(IconParamBlock *theBlock, long maskByteLength)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Ptr maskBuffer = (Ptr)(theBlock->maskBuffer);
|
||
|
short rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes,
|
||
|
height = ShortDiv(maskByteLength, rowBytes);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This catches the odd case in which an icon is larger than an icon
|
||
|
// but smaller than an icon with a mask. This makes sure we only use
|
||
|
// 32 bits of height so as not to overrun our buffer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (height > 32)
|
||
|
height = 32;
|
||
|
|
||
|
CalcMask((Ptr)(*(theBlock->theMask)),
|
||
|
maskBuffer, rowBytes, 4,
|
||
|
height, rowBytes >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = maskBuffer;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// SetupParamBlock finds the appropriate size category of icon to be dealing
|
||
|
// with, gets (or synthesizes) the mask for the data, locks all necessary data
|
||
|
// down, sets up the maskMap and some parameters that don't change throughout
|
||
|
// the course of the plot (or make region) call. It returns FALSE if no mask
|
||
|
// (1-bit data) could be found in any size category.
|
||
|
|
||
|
short SetupParamBlock(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short size,
|
||
|
rowBytes,
|
||
|
desired = ChooseBestSize(&(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
|
||
|
long maskByteLength;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle theMask;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find a mask of the right size category
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (size = desired; size <= miniIcon1; size += IconDepthSpace)
|
||
|
if (theMask = (*(theBlock->userProc))(theBlock->userData, size))
|
||
|
goto done;
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (size = desired - IconDepthSpace; size >= largeIcon1; size -= IconDepthSpace)
|
||
|
if (theMask = (*(theBlock->userProc))(theBlock->userData, size))
|
||
|
goto done;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
done:
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theMask = theMask;
|
||
|
theBlock->theGroup = size;
|
||
|
theBlock->theData = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// size here means the basic dimension (height) of the icon of specific size
|
||
|
// category. rowBytes here is a basic rowBytes of the one bit data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (size == largeIcon1)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
size = 32;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rowBytes = 2;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (size == smallIcon1)
|
||
|
size = 16;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
size = 12;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the basic rowBytes is stored because maskMap.rowBytes might be changed to 4
|
||
|
// arbitrarily if the mask is synthesized.
|
||
|
theBlock->rowBytes = rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// maskMap is setup
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes = rowBytes;
|
||
|
MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds) = 0L;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom = size;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.bounds.right = rowBytes << 3; // this insures that a mini icon is 12X16
|
||
|
|
||
|
// lock down the mask member and remember its state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(*theMask))
|
||
|
LoadResource(theMask); // theoretically its cool to let LoadResource decide whether the resource is loaded or not
|
||
|
// but LoadResource has been back-patched thrice at the time of this writing and all kinds
|
||
|
// of annoying stuff goes before the simple check of the master pointer. sigh.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following does a size check to guess whether an icon has a mask or not. If not,
|
||
|
// a probable mask is synthesized.
|
||
|
|
||
|
rowBytes *= size; // I'm hijacking rowbytes to use as a temp
|
||
|
rowBytes <<= 1;
|
||
|
maskByteLength = GetHandleSize(theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is no mask data appended to the one-bit version of this icon (i.e. its not a proper ICN#, ics#, icm#)
|
||
|
// synthesize a mask. Otherwise, we just point the maskMap baseAddr at the mask data in the one-bit icon.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (maskByteLength < rowBytes)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rowBytes >>= 1;
|
||
|
CreateMask(theBlock, maskByteLength);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (*theMask) + (maskByteLength >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is just to allow the Finder to use some SICN's as minis without special-casing (Grrrr!)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((theBlock->theGroup == miniIcon1) && (maskByteLength > rowBytes))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long center = ((theBlock->theRect.bottom + theBlock->theRect.top) >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theRect.top = center - 8;
|
||
|
theBlock->theRect.bottom = center + 8;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom = 16;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.bounds = theBlock->maskMap.bounds; // the mask and data have the same source bounds (may change later)
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.pixelSize = 0; // functions as flag saying "the data map is not yet initialized as a color grafport"
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->useRegions = false; // Initially assume that we will not use regions for transforms and hit testing.
|
||
|
// PrescaleMask may change this value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PrescaleMask is used after SetupParamBlock. If the destination rectangle of an icon is
|
||
|
// less than or equal to 32 in both dimensions, and if it is different in height or width
|
||
|
// to maskMap.bounds, we do the stretching that will take place off-screen. The result ends
|
||
|
// up in the maskBuffer and maskMap is modified to point to it. After calling PrescaleMask,
|
||
|
// you are guaranteed that the maskMap describes the countours of the icon's mask as it will
|
||
|
// be drawn (which is important for doing transforms and for hit-testing without doing region
|
||
|
// operations). If an icon is larger than our off-screen buffer (never under 7.0), we use
|
||
|
// region operations for hit-testing and transforms. PrescaleMask is called by HitTestIconGeneric
|
||
|
// and by PlotIconGeneric (only if there is a transform).
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PrescaleMask(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short width = theBlock->theRect.right - theBlock->theRect.left,
|
||
|
height = theBlock->theRect.bottom - theBlock->theRect.top;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((width > 32) || (height > 32))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->useRegions = true;
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This checks if any stretching will be done… we know that maskMap.bounds has (0,0) for its
|
||
|
// upper left coordinate.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((width != theBlock->maskMap.bounds.right) || (height != theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long tempBuffer[32];
|
||
|
BitMap tempMap;
|
||
|
Rect newBounds;
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeLong(newBounds) = 0;
|
||
|
newBounds.right = width;
|
||
|
newBounds.bottom = height;
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeLong(tempMap.bounds) = 0;
|
||
|
MakeLong(tempMap.bounds.bottom) = 0x00200020;
|
||
|
tempMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
tempMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)theBlock->maskBuffer;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if maskBuffer is currently being used, as in the case of a missing mask we have synthesized,
|
||
|
// we dump it temporarily to an intermediate buffer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr == theBlock->maskBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)tempBuffer;
|
||
|
BlockMoveData(theBlock->maskBuffer, tempBuffer, 32 * sizeof(unsigned long));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
CopyBits(&(theBlock->maskMap), &tempMap, &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), &newBounds, srcCopy, NULL);
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom) = MakeLong(newBounds.bottom);
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)theBlock->maskBuffer;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the routine that all plotting goes through. By the time we get to PlotIconGeneric, we
|
||
|
// have a handler routine and some data pushed that identifies how we are going to get suite
|
||
|
// members. For example, in the case of PlotIconID, the refCon is equal to the resource ID and
|
||
|
// the IconRetriever is set to a function call FromResource which calls GetResource for an icon
|
||
|
// type and the given ID. The dontDraw parameter allows for LoadIconCache to act as if it were
|
||
|
// drawing, but in stead just load the data.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// PlotIconGeneric is called from assembly language wrappers in IconUtils.a that Implement
|
||
|
// PlotIconID, PlotIconSuite, PlotIconMethod and LoadIconCache.
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define PrintVars (*((short *)0x948))
|
||
|
pascal OSErr PlotIconGeneric(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc,
|
||
|
short dontDraw)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GrafPort *curPort;
|
||
|
IconParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if this is a call to LoadIconCache and the input is not an iconcache,
|
||
|
// exit with a paramErr
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (dontDraw && !((*((IconSuiteHandle)refCon))->type))
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// save some basic information in the parameter block
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = refCon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = iconProc;
|
||
|
theBlock.theTransform = transform & transformMask;
|
||
|
theBlock.selected = transform & ttSelected;
|
||
|
theBlock.dontDraw = dontDraw;
|
||
|
|
||
|
curPort = myGetPort();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// useCopyMask is true if the icon does not need to go through bottlenecks
|
||
|
theBlock.useCopyMask = !((curPort->grafProcs) || (curPort->picSave));
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.dstMap = &(curPort->portBits);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SetupParamBlock(&theBlock))
|
||
|
return noMaskFoundErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// See MakeBoundary above. If no data was found in the mask portion of the
|
||
|
// one-bit data, then clearly CopyMask would not plot anything. So why bother
|
||
|
// doing any more work? This is not the same case as no one-bit data available.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!MakeBoundary(&theBlock))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// boundary-making and alignment have to take place before PrescaleMask, because they
|
||
|
// make certain assumptions about the mask which in general are no longer valid after the
|
||
|
// pre-scale.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// this line performs an off-screen stretching of the mask data if there is a
|
||
|
// a difference between the size of the destination rect and the mask size. Thus,
|
||
|
// the maskMap field will always have a correctly scaled mask of the data which
|
||
|
// can be used for creating transform effects etc. The one exception would be if the
|
||
|
// destination rect was so large that the pre-scaled mask would not fit in the 32 X 32
|
||
|
// buffer in the parameter block. In this case, the useRegions flag would be set and
|
||
|
// regions would be used for transforms, hit-testing etc.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock.theTransform)
|
||
|
PrescaleMask(&theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we are plotting to a PixMap, we lock down the mask (because color CopyBits/CopyMask
|
||
|
// can move memory), get label information and decide how to plot based on our screen setup.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (curPort->portBits.rowBytes < 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GDHandle theScreen;
|
||
|
Handle theMask = theBlock.theMask;
|
||
|
char maskState = HGetState(theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
HLock(theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theLabel = (transform & labelMask) >> labelShift;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theScreen = theGlobals->virtualScreen)
|
||
|
PlotTheIcon((*((*theScreen)->gdPMap))->pixelSize, 0, theScreen, &theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DeviceLoop(NULL, (DeviceLoopDrawingProcPtr)PlotTheIcon, (long)(&theBlock),
|
||
|
dontMatchSeeds | singleDevices | allDevices);
|
||
|
|
||
|
HSetState(theMask, maskState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock.theLabel = 0; // If we're not plotting to a CGrafPort, we don't use a label.
|
||
|
PlotTheIcon(1, 0, NULL, &theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
out:
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// IconToRgnGeneric is called by a bunch of assembly language wrappers in IconUtils.a to implement
|
||
|
// IconIDToRgn, IconSuiteToRgn and IconMethodToRgn. It is also called from HitTestIconGeneric if regions
|
||
|
// will be used to perform hit-testing. It takes a valid region, the rect to which the theoretical icon was drawn, the
|
||
|
// alignment used and the same kind of call-back used by PlotIconGeneric above. theRgn is changed to be
|
||
|
// equivalent to the icon's mask when aligned and stretched to the destination rect.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr IconToRgnGeneric(RgnHandle theRgn,
|
||
|
Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
IconAlignmentType align,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// minimal set up for call to SetupParamBlock (I know, its a little squirly that SetupParamBlock needs set up but…)
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = refCon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = iconProc;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we set up the IconParamBlock, which finds the right-sized mask for the destination rect and loads it. It also
|
||
|
// may synthesize a mask if a SICN or ICON is used for a one-bit icon.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SetupParamBlock(&theBlock))
|
||
|
return noMaskFoundErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is no data in the mask, we make an empty region. Makes sense.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (MakeBoundary(&theBlock))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// MaskRgn moves memory so we lock down our mask. Note for future change: a check should be made here
|
||
|
// to see if the mask is in maskBuffer, in which case this lock and restore is extraneous.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle theMask = theBlock.theMask;
|
||
|
char maskState = HGetState(theMask);
|
||
|
HLock(theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there's an alignment specified, we do it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// make the region and stretch it appropriately
|
||
|
|
||
|
MaskRgn(theRgn, &theBlock);
|
||
|
AdjustRgn(theRgn, &(theBlock.maskMap.bounds), &(theBlock.theRect));
|
||
|
|
||
|
HSetState(theMask, maskState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
SetEmptyRgn(theRgn);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// HitTestIconMaskGeneric is called from HitTestIconGeneric (See Below) if regions are not used for the
|
||
|
// hit-testing. It takes the same input as HitTestIconGeneric. The test is performed by stretching the
|
||
|
// mask data off-screen (if necessary) and comparing the point or rect to this data arithmeticly.
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define isAPoint 0
|
||
|
#define isARect 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal Boolean HitTestIconMaskGeneric(unsigned long pointOrRect,
|
||
|
short IsRect,
|
||
|
Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
IconAlignmentType align,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
Rect sectRect;
|
||
|
unsigned long testMap;
|
||
|
short theRow,
|
||
|
theCount;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Set up for call to SetupParamBlock (yeah yeah, I know)
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = refCon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = iconProc;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there is no one-bit data or the mask contains nothing but zeros, we return false
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SetupParamBlock(&theBlock) || !MakeBoundary(&theBlock))
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there is alignment, we do it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theRect = &(theBlock.theRect); // we hijak the parameter theRect to point to the possibly shifted destination rectangle
|
||
|
// (NOTE: This is very silly. The idea was to make references to theRect smaller and faster.
|
||
|
// Why not make a new variable, or not do this at all and refer to the rect as theBlock.theRect??
|
||
|
// We luck out under the 3.2 compiler, which sees that we refer to theRect a lot and allocates A3
|
||
|
// for this. If we were out of address registers, this would make larger and slower code)
|
||
|
|
||
|
PrescaleMask(&theBlock); // if the icon is to be shrunken, this routine will do the shrinking offscreen and place the
|
||
|
// result in maskMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we set up theRow, theCount and testMap to test against the pre-scaled mask data. theRow is equal to the first row of the maskMap
|
||
|
// that we will test. theCount is equal to the number of rows we will test. testMap is a long-word bitMap which we will intersect
|
||
|
// with each row that we test. If any row has intersection with testMap, then we have a hit.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// we do the intersection with the possibly shifted rectangle to see if alignment has moved us
|
||
|
// out of the test rect. (if there is no alignment, this is redundant with the SectRect we did
|
||
|
// in HitTestIconGeneric below. This probably needs restructuring in a new version.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SectRect((Rect *)pointOrRect, theRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we set test map equal to one scan-line of the rectangle intersection of the test rect and the destination
|
||
|
|
||
|
testMap = 0xffffffff;
|
||
|
testMap <<= (32 - (sectRect.right - sectRect.left));
|
||
|
testMap >>= (sectRect.left - theRect->left);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theRow is the top of the intersection rectangle in destination co-ordinates.
|
||
|
|
||
|
theRow = (sectRect.top - theRect->top);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theCount is equal to the height of the intersection
|
||
|
|
||
|
theCount = (sectRect.bottom - sectRect.top);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// testMap is set to a one bit at the horizontal location of the test point in destination co-ordinates
|
||
|
|
||
|
testMap = 1 << (31 - ((short)(pointOrRect & 0xffff) - theRect->left));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theRow is set equal to the vertical location of the test point in destination co-ordinates
|
||
|
|
||
|
theRow = ((short)(pointOrRect >> 16)) - theRect->top;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// there is only one row to test
|
||
|
|
||
|
theCount = 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Here we take theRow, theCount and testMap and compare it to the mask data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short rowBytes = theBlock.maskMap.rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// since we treat rows that are sometimes only a word in width as long words, we need
|
||
|
// to mask off the right most data that is significant.
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long significantMask = -1L << (32 - theBlock.maskMap.bounds.right);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned char *maskData = theBlock.maskMap.baseAddr + ShortMul(rowBytes, theRow),
|
||
|
*endData = maskData + ShortMul(rowBytes, theCount);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// start at theRow and loop through theCount rows, testing for itersection with testMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if (*((unsigned long *)maskData) & significantMask & testMap)
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
|
||
|
maskData += rowBytes;
|
||
|
} while (maskData < endData);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// HitTestIconGeneric is called by assembly language wrappers in IconUtils.a to implement PtInIconID,
|
||
|
// PtInIconSuite, PtInIconMethod, RectInIconID, RectInIconSuite and RectInIconMethod. It takes a value
|
||
|
// which is either a point or pointer to a rect along with a flag indicating which one it is. It also
|
||
|
// takes a rect which is where the icon being hit-test was drawn and the alignment that was used. Finally,
|
||
|
// the generic call-back and refcon used in all the generic routines (PlotIconGeneric, IconToRgnGeneric, etc.)
|
||
|
// It returns true if the mask data as aligned and stretched intersects either the rect or the pixel to
|
||
|
// the lower right of the point. It returns false if there is no intersection or if any kind of error was
|
||
|
// encountered.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal Boolean HitTestIconGeneric(unsigned long pointOrRect,
|
||
|
Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
IconAlignmentType align,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc,
|
||
|
short IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Boolean rval = false;
|
||
|
RgnHandle testRgn = NULL;
|
||
|
Rect sectRect;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if the test rectangle does not even touch the destination rect, clearly there is no hit
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SectRect((Rect *)pointOrRect, theRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the test rectangle completely engulfs the destination rectangle, clearly there is a
|
||
|
// hit and no further testing is required.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (EqualRect(theRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
goto trueOut;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
if (!PtInRect(*((Point *)(&pointOrRect)), theRect)) // If our point is not in the ball-bark, we bail
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The only time we would use IconToRgnGeneric to test pointOrRect would be if our maskMap needed scaling
|
||
|
// and we could not do the scaling off-screen with PrescaleMask. This is only true if the height or
|
||
|
// width of the destination rect is greater than 32 (the size of our off-screen buffer). Otherwise, we
|
||
|
// use HitTestIconmaskGeneric which is faster and dosen't move memory as much.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((theRect->right - theRect->left) > 32) || ((theRect->bottom - theRect->top) > 32))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
testRgn = NewRgn();
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IconToRgnGeneric(testRgn, theRect, align, refCon, iconProc))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!RectInRgn((Rect *)pointOrRect, testRgn))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
if (!PtInRgn(*((Point *)(&pointOrRect)), testRgn))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else if (!HitTestIconMaskGeneric(pointOrRect, IsRect, theRect, align, refCon, iconProc))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
trueOut:
|
||
|
|
||
|
rval = true;
|
||
|
|
||
|
out:
|
||
|
if (testRgn)
|
||
|
DisposeRgn(testRgn);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// MakeIconData is called after DeviceList is initialized to set up the ExpandMem global structure used by the icon utilities.
|
||
|
// The structure is returned in the variable parameter iconCluts. (Named for historical reasons and not changed lately)
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// This is the layout of the structure:
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// #define Labels 8
|
||
|
// #define Sets 8
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// typedef struct
|
||
|
// {
|
||
|
// Strings labelStrings; // array of eight string handles to label strings. On a black and
|
||
|
// // white Mac, the rest of the structure after this point is not allocated.
|
||
|
// long seeds[Labels * Sets]; // array of seeds for all the cluts (transformed and labeled)
|
||
|
// CTabHandle colorTables[Labels * Sets], // array of CTabHandles for all cluts
|
||
|
// originals[2]; // handles to the two original rom cluts (clut 4 and clut 8)
|
||
|
// RGBColor labelColors[Labels]; // array of 8 label colors
|
||
|
// unsigned char **indexLists[2]; // two handles to arrays of indices used in checking colors
|
||
|
// GDHandle virtualScreen; // a GDHandle used by SetIconDevice and GetIconDevice
|
||
|
// long deviceListSize; // number of GDevices at boot time
|
||
|
// DeviceCheck deviceCheckList[0]; // a variable number of DeviceCheck structures used to cache
|
||
|
// // the results of CheckColors for all GDevices
|
||
|
// } GlobalIconData;
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// typedef Handle Strings[Labels];
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// typedef struct
|
||
|
// {
|
||
|
// GDHandle theDevice; // Handle to the GDevice that we're caching the information about
|
||
|
// long theSeed; // the seed of its GDPmap's pmTable at last caching
|
||
|
// unsigned long checkMask, // a bit-map specifying which cluts we actually tried and cached results for
|
||
|
// checkResults, // results of caching as a bit-map
|
||
|
// disabledCheckMask, // the other long word of the CheckMask bit-map needed when we added disabled cluts
|
||
|
// disabledCheckResults; // the other long word of the CheckResults bit-map needed when we added disabled cluts
|
||
|
// } DeviceCheck;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// SetUpDeviceCaches initializes the DeviceCheck structures in the GlobalIconData deviceCheckList array
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void SetUpDeviceCaches(GlobalIconData *temp)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GDHandle aGDHandle = DeviceList;
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *checkPtr = temp->deviceCheckList;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
checkPtr->theDevice = aGDHandle;
|
||
|
checkPtr->theSeed = (*((*((*aGDHandle)->gdPMap))->pmTable))->ctSeed;
|
||
|
checkPtr->checkMask = 0L;
|
||
|
checkPtr->disabledCheckMask = 0L;
|
||
|
++checkPtr;
|
||
|
aGDHandle = (GDHandle)((*aGDHandle)->gdNextGD);
|
||
|
} while (aGDHandle);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __UpdateIconGlobals(void)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theOldData = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theNewData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
GDHandle aGDHandle = DeviceList;
|
||
|
|
||
|
short devices = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
long size = sizeof(GlobalIconData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
++devices;
|
||
|
size += sizeof(DeviceCheck);
|
||
|
aGDHandle = (GDHandle)((*aGDHandle)->gdNextGD);
|
||
|
} while (aGDHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(theNewData = (GlobalIconDataPtr)NewPtrSysClear(size)))
|
||
|
return MemError();
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)theOldData, (Ptr)theNewData, sizeof(GlobalIconData));
|
||
|
|
||
|
DisposPtr((Ptr)theOldData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theNewData->deviceListSize = devices;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetUpDeviceCaches(theNewData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetExpandMemIconCluts((Ptr) theNewData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr iconGestaltProc(OSType, long *response)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*response = 1;
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void MakeIconData(GlobalIconDataPtr *iconCluts)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long size,
|
||
|
devices;
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr temp;
|
||
|
short curResFile, i;
|
||
|
Handle aHandle,
|
||
|
*strPtr;
|
||
|
RGBColor *colorPtr;
|
||
|
GDHandle aGDHandle;
|
||
|
|
||
|
(void)NewGestalt(gestaltIconUtilities, (ProcPtr)iconGestaltProc);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're running on a color machine, allocate the whole structure. Otherwise, just allocate the
|
||
|
// label string list.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
aGDHandle = DeviceList;
|
||
|
size = sizeof(GlobalIconData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
devices = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
++devices;
|
||
|
size += sizeof(DeviceCheck);
|
||
|
aGDHandle = (GDHandle)((*aGDHandle)->gdNextGD);
|
||
|
} while (aGDHandle);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
size = sizeof(Strings);
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp = (GlobalIconDataPtr)NewPtrSysClear(size);
|
||
|
|
||
|
*iconCluts = temp; // return the structure in the variable parameter
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = &(temp->labelStrings); // point to the beginning of the label string handles
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the label strings (Should they be unloaded?)
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = labelColorBase; i < (labelColorBase + Labels); ++i)
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('lstr', i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're not on a color machine, we're done.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!HaveCQD())
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// virtualScreen is initially NULL, indicating that we will traverse the list of devices normally.
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp->virtualScreen = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// set deviceListSize with the count we generated for allocation
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp->deviceListSize = devices;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Run through the list of devices, initializing our cache of device information.
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetUpDeviceCaches(temp);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Save the current resource file and set to the System file.
|
||
|
|
||
|
curResFile = CurResFile();
|
||
|
UseResFile(0);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the two lists of color indices to check at CheckColors time
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&(temp->indexLists));
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('indl', labelColorBase);
|
||
|
*strPtr = GetResource('indl', labelColorBase + 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the two standard system clut's for 8 and 4 bits from ROM
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&(temp->originals));
|
||
|
*((short *)RomMapInsert) = mapTrue;
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('clut',8);
|
||
|
*((short *)RomMapInsert) = mapTrue;
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('clut',4);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Set the first label color to black.
|
||
|
|
||
|
colorPtr = &(temp->labelColors);
|
||
|
*((long *)(colorPtr)) = 0L;
|
||
|
colorPtr->blue = 0;
|
||
|
++colorPtr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the other seven label colors from resources
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = (labelColorBase + 1); i < (labelColorBase + Labels); ++i)
|
||
|
*colorPtr++ = **((RGBColor **)GetResource('rgb ', i));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Restore the resource file
|
||
|
|
||
|
UseResFile(curResFile);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the seed for the 8-bit system clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&(temp->seeds));
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)((*(temp->originals[0]))->ctSeed);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Generate seeds for the other 7 labeled 8-bit cluts and the
|
||
|
// selected clut and the 7 labeled selected 8-bit cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 1; i < (Labels * 2); ++i)
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)GetCTSeed();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the see for the 4-bit system clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)((*(temp->originals[1]))->ctSeed);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Generate seeds for the other 7 labeled 4-bit cluts and the
|
||
|
// selected 4-bit clut and the 7 labeled selected 4-bit cluts and
|
||
|
// all the other combinations of labeled, selected and disabled cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 1; i < (Labels * 6); ++i)
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)GetCTSeed();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Allocate empty handles for all the cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&(temp->colorTables));
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 0; i < (Labels * Sets); ++i)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
aHandle = NewEmptyHandleSys();
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = aHandle;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define acceptableDelta (2 * 256)
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CompareComponent takes two color components and returns 0 if the two are equal within
|
||
|
// the tolerance specified by acceptableDelta, a negative number if the first is less than
|
||
|
// the second by acceptableDelta and a positive number if the first is greater than the
|
||
|
// second by acceptableDelta.
|
||
|
|
||
|
long CompareComponent(unsigned short comp1, unsigned short comp2)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long absoluteDifference = (unsigned long)comp1 - (unsigned long)comp2;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((absoluteDifference < acceptableDelta) && (absoluteDifference > -acceptableDelta))
|
||
|
return 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return absoluteDifference;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Darken is used to reduce the brightness of an RGBColor to create selected clut's. The intention
|
||
|
// is to take a color, halve all the components and then increase the saturation of the result by
|
||
|
// halving again all but the strongest component. It is necessary to increase the saturation of
|
||
|
// a color when you halve its components because dividing all the components by two causes
|
||
|
// the difference in component values to become much smaller, decreasing the saturation. The alogrithm
|
||
|
// implemented below causes the HSV value of the color to be halved, while approximately maintaining
|
||
|
// the color's original saturation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void Darken(RGBColor *aColor)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned short *smallest = &(aColor->red),
|
||
|
*notSmallest1 = &(aColor->green),
|
||
|
*notSmallest2 = &(aColor->blue),
|
||
|
*temp = smallest;
|
||
|
|
||
|
long compareValue;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// halve all values
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor->red >>= 1;
|
||
|
aColor->green >>= 1;
|
||
|
aColor->blue >>= 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Gray has zero saturation, so it can't lose anything in
|
||
|
// the darkening process. Thus we are done in the grayish case.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest1) && !CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest2))
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find the smallest color component.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest1) > 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
temp = smallest;
|
||
|
smallest = notSmallest1;
|
||
|
notSmallest1 = temp;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest2) > 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
temp = smallest;
|
||
|
smallest = notSmallest2;
|
||
|
notSmallest2 = temp;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Divide its value by two again, so that the larger components are emphasized.
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*smallest) >>= 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// take the runner-up in the race for first place and divide it by two again so that
|
||
|
// the largest component is emphasized. If its a tie, we're done.
|
||
|
|
||
|
compareValue = CompareComponent(*notSmallest1, *notSmallest2);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (compareValue < 0)
|
||
|
(*notSmallest1) >>= 1;
|
||
|
else if (compareValue > 0)
|
||
|
(*notSmallest2) >>= 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Luminance takes an RGBColor and generates a value from 0 to 0xffff equal to the percieved
|
||
|
// gray-scale brightness of the color. The algorithm (which is the same one used by the QuickDraw
|
||
|
// to make such conversions) is to take a weighted average of all the components, where the weights
|
||
|
// are 1/8 of the blue component, 5/16 of the red component and 9/16 of the green component. The routine
|
||
|
// is used by Brighten to decide how much to brighten a color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long Luminance(RGBColor *aColor)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long temp;
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp = ((unsigned long)aColor->red) << 2; // five times the red component
|
||
|
temp += aColor->red;
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp += ((unsigned long)aColor->green) << 3; // plus nine times the green component
|
||
|
temp += aColor->green;
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp += ((unsigned long)aColor->blue) << 1; // plus two times the blue component
|
||
|
|
||
|
return (temp >> 4); // divide the sum by 16 to get the weighted average
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Brighten takes an RGBColor, reduces its saturation and increases its brightness (virtually the inverse
|
||
|
// of Darken). It is used by MakeClut to take a raw label color and convert it into a color which can be
|
||
|
// applied to a clut and used to label 8-bit icons. Brightened colors will not seriously affect the
|
||
|
// brightness of the icon's unselected appearance, but will retain much of the character of the original color.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// A little background: A label color is applied to a clut color by multiplying each component by the
|
||
|
// percentage strength of the corresponding label color component. For example, a label color of
|
||
|
// {0x7fff, 0x3fff, 0xffff} would be interpreted as 50% red, 25% green, 100% blue and each clut color
|
||
|
// would have its components multiplied by the corresponding fraction. Since the standard label colors
|
||
|
// vary greatly in their effect on a clut color and since a label color can be customized by the user to
|
||
|
// any value, a label color must be processed so that it does not reduce the brightness of an affected
|
||
|
// icon to the point where it looks selected or unreadably dark. An ideal label color has low HSV saturation
|
||
|
// so that no color component is so attenuated that it becomes very dark. A pure blue for example is
|
||
|
// 100% saturated and would reduce all components except blue to zero, making for a very dark icon. A low
|
||
|
// saturation color has a lot of gray in it, thus allowing some representation from all colors in the icon.
|
||
|
// A good label color should also have a value (in the HSV sense of the word value) of 100%; that is, it should
|
||
|
// have at least one component that is 100%, so that the overall value of the resultant color is not greatly reduced.
|
||
|
// Finally, whatever process is used to turn a bad label color into a good label color should preserve the HSV hue
|
||
|
// of the color, since that is what gives the color its "character". A further constraint on the algorithm to make
|
||
|
// any label color usable is that it be sensitive to the hue. For example, an unprocessed blue label color of a
|
||
|
// certain saturation and value will make an icon look darker than an unprocessed green label color of the same
|
||
|
// saturation and value, because the human eye is many times more sensitive to green than to blue. Thus a blue
|
||
|
// label color needs to have its saturation reduced more than a green label color.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// The algorithm: The processing of any arbitrary color into a good label color takes place conceptually in three
|
||
|
// steps (although it it implemented in one pass through the components). The first step is to increase the HSV
|
||
|
// value of the color to 100%, while nearly maintaining the hue. This is done by multiplying each component by a
|
||
|
// factor which takes the maximum component to 0xffff, thus "stretching" the color to its maximum value.
|
||
|
// The second step multiplies the color by a fraction related to the original luminance of the label color. This
|
||
|
// makes the color closer to a gray (i.e. lowers its saturation) and incidentally lowers its over all value (brightness).
|
||
|
// The third step compensates for the incidental loss of brightness by adding in a constant value, which is the complement
|
||
|
// of the compression factor. The maximum component in the resulting color is 100%, the saturation has been lowered to
|
||
|
// an extent related to the luminance and the hue is maintained.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void Brighten(RGBColor *labelColor)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned short *component = (unsigned short *)labelColor,
|
||
|
*end = component + 3;
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long temp,
|
||
|
luminance = Luminance(labelColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned short basis,
|
||
|
max = labelColor->red;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find the maximum component
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor->green > max)
|
||
|
max = labelColor->green;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor->blue > max)
|
||
|
max = labelColor->blue;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the ultimate brightening. Black gets mapped to white. This implements the "feature"
|
||
|
// that specifying black as a label color means "label this with a text only. Don't apply a color
|
||
|
// to this icon." White will in no way affect the appearance of the icon. This was the lowest impact
|
||
|
// change to implement this feature. A more optimal solution in terms of performance would be to
|
||
|
// bail in PlotIconGeneric when we see a black label color. This implies that we should store the
|
||
|
// label color in the parameter block (since we're going to all the trouble of getting it so early on
|
||
|
// in the plot process). This involves some broad changes in labeling code which did not seem warranted
|
||
|
// at B4 time.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!max)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*((long *)labelColor) = -1;
|
||
|
labelColor->blue = 0xffff;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// here we calculate the parameters basis and luminance. luminance is related to the gray-scale brightness
|
||
|
// of the color being brightened, but is compressed to range from 0x6000 to 0xffff. Basis is the complement
|
||
|
// of luminance and ranges from 0x9fff to 0. Calculating the values in this way makes the process of
|
||
|
// brightening sensitive to the color being brightened. If the luminance of the color is low, the basis
|
||
|
// will be large and their will be a greater reduction in saturation.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// NOTE: the extent to which luminance is compressed into a smaller range ensures that there is a minimum
|
||
|
// saturation decrease. In the code below, luminance is multiplied by 5/8 and 3/8 of 100% (0x6000) is added
|
||
|
// on to it to achieve the compression. If a fraction smaller the 5/8 is used, the overall saturation of all
|
||
|
// labeled colors will increase. Multiplying luminance by 1/2 and adding 0x8000 produces labeled icons which
|
||
|
// are slightly to dark. Some observers have noted that the current settings produce icons whose labeling
|
||
|
// does not sufficiently suggest the color chosen from the Finder labels menu. This is an area that bears
|
||
|
// some further investigation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
luminance >>= 1; // halve luminance
|
||
|
luminance += (luminance >> 2); // add a quarter of the halved luminance to the halved luminance to get 5/8 luminance
|
||
|
luminance += 0x6000; // add about 3/8 of the whole range to the number
|
||
|
basis = 0xffff - luminance;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This loop uses the calculated parameters luminance and basic to perform the brightening.
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
temp = (unsigned long)(*component);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// stretch the color. If the maximum component is already 100%, skip this step for all components
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (max < 0xffff)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
temp *= 0xffff;
|
||
|
temp /= max; // max will only be zero if the label color is black in which case we will not reach this point
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// compress the color
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp *= luminance;
|
||
|
temp /= 0xffff;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// add in a gray component
|
||
|
|
||
|
*component++ = basis + (unsigned short)temp;
|
||
|
} while (component < end);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// NOTE: for a future version, the following loop body would have been much better. On the other hand, the current
|
||
|
// version makes the underlying model more clear and performance is not particularly critical in this routine.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// temp = (unsigned long)(*component);
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// if (temp < 0xffff)
|
||
|
// {
|
||
|
// temp *= luminance;
|
||
|
// temp /= max;
|
||
|
// *component = basis + (unsigned short)temp;
|
||
|
// }
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// ++component;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// FindBlack is called by MakeClut to find the lowest luminance color in a clut. Why? It's for the 4-bit labeled true CIcon
|
||
|
// (don't laugh). When such an icon is labeled, the rule is that I turn the black color to the label color. In an Icon
|
||
|
// suite, the black color we want is well-defined as the 15 entry. In a CIcon, there may be no real black, so I'll have to
|
||
|
// choose something to label. Might as well be the closest thing to black. NOTE: a next version of this code should check
|
||
|
// the last entry in the clut to see if it is black, and if so it should return clutSize. If the last entry is black, that's
|
||
|
// the one we want. A good way to accomplish this would be to do the search from the last entry backward, bailing if any
|
||
|
// color is black (something this code should do anyway), taking the minimum luminance value otherwise.
|
||
|
|
||
|
long FindBlack(CTabHandle theClut, long clutSize)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec *specList = (*theClut)->ctTable;
|
||
|
unsigned long luminance,
|
||
|
minLuminance = 0xffff;
|
||
|
long rval = 0,
|
||
|
index = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
luminance = Luminance(&(specList->rgb));
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (luminance < minLuminance)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
minLuminance = luminance;
|
||
|
rval = clutSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
++index;
|
||
|
++specList;
|
||
|
} while (index <= clutSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// MakeClut is called by CheckClut if IconGetClut passes it a purged clut or by GetBestData if IconGetClut returns a purged clut.
|
||
|
// The clut is reallocated, a copy of the ROM clut of the appropriate bit-depth (4 or 8) is copied into it, it is given
|
||
|
// its old seed back and is then processed according to the transform and label. MakeClut is also called by
|
||
|
// SetupParamBlockForCIcon to process a copy of the CIcon's clut to do transforms.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void MakeClut(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short labelNumber = theBlock->clutNumber; // 0-7, which label, if any, we are using
|
||
|
|
||
|
CTabHandle theClut = theBlock->theClut; // the purged clut handle we are rebuilding
|
||
|
|
||
|
short sourceNumber; // 0 or 1, specifies which of the ROM clut's we will use for a source
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned char *listPtr; // pointer to the list of clut indices to be protected with CheckColors
|
||
|
|
||
|
long blackEntry, // index of the color we will consider black for this clut (see FindBlack above)
|
||
|
entryNo,
|
||
|
clutSize; // number of entries in the processed clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
ColorSpec *specList;
|
||
|
|
||
|
RGBColor aColor,
|
||
|
labelColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're recreating a purged IconSuite clut, we will use the clut database in our ExpandMem
|
||
|
// globals for the source. If we are processing a copy of a CIcon clut, we get the clut from
|
||
|
// our parameter block.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theGroup != aCIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
long theSeed = theGlobals->seeds[labelNumber];
|
||
|
CTabHandle source;
|
||
|
unsigned char **theList;
|
||
|
unsigned long size;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// this convoluted arithmetic of getting a labelNumber and sourceNumber from the
|
||
|
// clutNumber (as opposed to just looking at the theLabel field) comes from the fact
|
||
|
// that theLabel specifies what label the user asked for, not necessarily the one
|
||
|
// we're going to give him. For example, if the plotting takes place on a gray screen,
|
||
|
// the label is ignored. The clutNumber reflects this fact, and theLabel does not.
|
||
|
// I could have had more fields in the IconParamBlock to figure all this out, but they would
|
||
|
// have to be set up by IconGetClut. In general, it is more important for IconGetClut to be fast,
|
||
|
// since in most cases, the clut will be already created and cached. We now return you
|
||
|
// to your regularly scheduled programming.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the transform is ttDisabled, labelNumber will be in the range of disabled clut numbers.
|
||
|
// This line brings it back into the lower range.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
labelNumber -= ((Labels * Sets) >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the clut is in the 4-bit range, bring it into the lower range and record the fact that
|
||
|
// we will be building a 4-bit clut.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelNumber >= (Labels << 1))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
labelNumber -= (Labels << 1);
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 1;
|
||
|
blackEntry = 15; // Only used if we are processing 4-bit cluts. For non-CIcons blackEntry is always 15
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
labelNumber >>= 1; // There is a selected and non-selected version of every clut. Dividing by two puts
|
||
|
// labelNumber into the range 0-7.
|
||
|
|
||
|
source = theGlobals->originals[sourceNumber]; // get a handle to the source clut
|
||
|
theList = theGlobals->indexLists[sourceNumber]; // get a handle to the list of indices to protect
|
||
|
size = GetHandleSize((Handle)source); // get the size to reallocate the purged clut
|
||
|
clutSize = (*source)->ctSize; // get the number of entries in the clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
ReallocHandle((Handle)theClut, size); // reallocate the clut
|
||
|
HPurge((Handle)theClut); // make clut purgable
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)(*source), (Ptr)(*theClut), size); // copy in the source clut
|
||
|
(*theClut)->ctSeed = theSeed; // restore its unique seed
|
||
|
listPtr = *theList; // dereference the index list handle
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// a CIcon's clut is copied and processed each time it is plotted (to each screen if on multiple monitors) Thus,
|
||
|
// the values used to determine the parameters used in processing are determined differently.
|
||
|
|
||
|
listPtr = NULL; // CIcon cluts are never checked with CheckColors so listPtr is irrelevant
|
||
|
clutSize = (*theClut)->ctSize; // theClut is already a copy so whatever we take whatever size it is
|
||
|
|
||
|
// For a CIcon, sourceNumber is used only to mean "Shall we process this clut in the 4-bit style (1) or the
|
||
|
// 8-bit style (0)"
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->screenDepth < 8)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 1;
|
||
|
blackEntry = FindBlack(theClut, clutSize);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 0;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there's a label get the RGBColor
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GetLabel(labelNumber, &labelColor, NULL);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're processing an 8-bit clut, we Brighten the color. We don't do it in four bits because there's very little
|
||
|
// hope of achieving the subtle color effects that we can in 8-bits. The labeling algorithm in 4-bits is different
|
||
|
// anyway and does not require the brightening process. (See Brighten above)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!sourceNumber)
|
||
|
Brighten(&labelColor);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
specList = (*theClut)->ctTable; // point to the beginning of the list of ColorSpecs in theClut
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Loop through all the clut entries, doing various kinds of color arithmetic to achieve the
|
||
|
// transformed clut effects.
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (entryNo = 0; entryNo <= clutSize; ++entryNo)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// we only do labeling and selection processing on clut entries in the index list. That way,
|
||
|
// an icon designer could decide to use some colors for detail outside this list and not have
|
||
|
// them labeled or selected. Thus, if we have a listPtr, we check if this entry is in the list
|
||
|
// before processing. We process all colors otherwise (for CIcons).
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((!listPtr) || (entryNo == *listPtr))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// If we have a listPtr, increment it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (listPtr)
|
||
|
++listPtr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor = specList->rgb; // make a copy of the color to process
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is a label color, apply it to this clut entry.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if the clut is 4-bit, set the black entry of the clut to the label color.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, tint the entire clut to the brightened label color by multiplying
|
||
|
// each component of each color by the fractional strength of the corresponding
|
||
|
// component of the label color. The net effect of this process is to "filter"
|
||
|
// the clut entry through the label color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (sourceNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (entryNo == blackEntry)
|
||
|
aColor = labelColor;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (entryNo)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// multiplying the components together in this fashion has the effect of "filtering"
|
||
|
// the entry color through the label color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor.red = (aColor.red * (unsigned long)(labelColor.red)) >> 16;
|
||
|
aColor.green = (aColor.green * (unsigned long)(labelColor.green)) >> 16;
|
||
|
aColor.blue = (aColor.blue * (unsigned long)(labelColor.blue)) >> 16;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if possible, the white entry has to be "brighter" than any other color, so instead of
|
||
|
// multiplying white by the label color (which would simply produce the label color),
|
||
|
// we bias the label color toward white and use that.
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor.red = ((unsigned long)(aColor.red) + labelColor.red) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.green = ((unsigned long)(aColor.green) + labelColor.green) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.blue = ((unsigned long)(aColor.blue) + labelColor.blue) >> 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If this clut is for a selected icon, we apply the darkening algorithm to every affected entry
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
Darken(&aColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
specList->rgb = aColor; // record the processed color
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
specList->value |= 4; // If this color is not in the protected list, we set the inhibit bit which causes
|
||
|
// CheckColors to ignore this entry.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the transform is ttDisabled, we average the color with white. This has the affect of "bleaching" the color,
|
||
|
// making it seem "grayed" in the same sense that disabled text is shown.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
aColor = specList->rgb;
|
||
|
aColor.red = ((unsigned long)(aColor.red) + 0xffff) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.green = ((unsigned long)(aColor.green) + 0xffff) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.blue = ((unsigned long)(aColor.blue) + 0xffff) >> 1;
|
||
|
specList->rgb = aColor;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
++specList; // Get the next entry in the clut
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// GetDeviceCheck is called by IconGetClut to get the DeviceCheck structure corresponding to theDevice.
|
||
|
// The DeviceCheck structure is used to cache information about which cluts have been checked against
|
||
|
// a certain GDevice's available colors.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// A little background: CheckColors is a palette manager routine that takes a CTabHandle, a GDevice and some
|
||
|
// tolerance values and returns a boolean, indicating whether the clut's colors can be represented on that device
|
||
|
// to the specified tolerance. To avoid calling CheckColors every time we plot, we cache the results of the
|
||
|
// check in a list of structures stored at the end of our ExpandMem globals. There is one structure for every
|
||
|
// GDevice in the DeviceList. Each structure contains a GDHandle to the corresponding device, the seed of the
|
||
|
// device's color table at the time of the last check and two 64-bit bit-maps, each corresponding to the 64
|
||
|
// different cluts used in plotting color icons. One of the bit-maps indicates whether the clut has been
|
||
|
// checked. The other bit-map indicates the result (good or bad) of the check. Before a clut is returned by
|
||
|
// IconGetClut, the DeviceCheck for the given GDevice is consulted to see if the clut has already been checked
|
||
|
// for that device, and if so, what the result was. If the clut has never before been checked, CheckColors
|
||
|
// is called, the DeviceCheck structure is updated to indicate that the clut has been checked and the
|
||
|
// result is cached.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *GetDeviceCheck(GDHandle theDevice, GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *theCheck = &(theGlobals->deviceCheckList[0]); // prime the pointer to the beginning of deviceCheckList
|
||
|
long listSize = theGlobals->deviceListSize,
|
||
|
theSeed = (*((*((*theDevice)->gdPMap))->pmTable))->ctSeed; // Get the device's ColorTable's seed
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Loop through all the DeviceCheck structures in the list, looking for the one corresponding to theDevice
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if (theCheck->theDevice == theDevice)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if we find a device, check if its seed has changed since the last check we did. If it has, none of
|
||
|
// the cached check values are valid, so we invalidate the cache and update theSeed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theCheck->theSeed != theSeed)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theCheck->theSeed = theSeed;
|
||
|
theCheck->checkMask = 0L;
|
||
|
theCheck->disabledCheckMask = 0L;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return theCheck;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
--listSize;
|
||
|
++theCheck;
|
||
|
} while (listSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define iconMaxTol 0x4000
|
||
|
#define iconMaxAveTol 0x2000
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CheckClut takes a parameter block and calls CheckColors on theClut. If theClut is purged,
|
||
|
// we rebuild it first. (NOTE: I don't know why this routine returns a long. Should be a Boolean)
|
||
|
|
||
|
long CheckClut(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if the clut dosen't exist, make it
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(*(theBlock->theClut)))
|
||
|
MakeClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the tolerances used here mean that any given color can be represented if the device has a
|
||
|
// color within 25% of it. The average tolerance of all colors in the clut must be within
|
||
|
// 12.5%. These values are empirically derived, but otherwise arbitrary.
|
||
|
|
||
|
return CheckColors(theBlock->theDevice, theBlock->theClut, iconMaxTol, iconMaxAveTol);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// IconGetClut gets the clut that should be used to plot an icon described by theBlock using data
|
||
|
// of the theDepth depth. On entry, theBlock has theDevice, theTransform, selected and theLabel
|
||
|
// fields set up. On exit, theBlock has theClut and clutNumber set up. IconGetClut returns false if
|
||
|
// the clut for the icon plotted to theDepth does not pass the CheckColors test for the given
|
||
|
// device. (See GetDeviceCheck above). The basic procedure for finding the clut is to generate
|
||
|
// an index into the array of cluts in the ExpandMem globals from the information in theBlock and
|
||
|
// theDepth. The clut is then checked, using the cached information in the deviceCheckList (See
|
||
|
// GetDeviceCheck above) or CheckClut (see above) if necessary. If the clut passes the test we
|
||
|
// return true, otherwise we return false. (NOTE: again this function should return a boolean
|
||
|
// in stead of a long)
|
||
|
|
||
|
long IconGetClut(IconParamBlock *theBlock, short theDepth)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
short clutNumber; // index into clut array
|
||
|
unsigned long clutMask,
|
||
|
*theCheckMap,
|
||
|
*theResult;
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *theCheck;
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice = theBlock->theDevice;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we are not on a gray-scale monitor, clutNumber is set to twice the label number (because
|
||
|
// there are two cluts for each label, selected and not selected). No labeling is attempted
|
||
|
// on a gray-scale monitor.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((theDevice && (!((*theDevice)->gdFlags & 0x1))))
|
||
|
clutNumber = 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
clutNumber = theBlock->theLabel << 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Even numbered cluts are unselected, odd numbered cluts are selected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
++clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The second half of the array contains transformed cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
clutNumber += ((Labels * Sets) >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the 4-bit cluts follow the 8-bit cluts in the transformed and untransformed groups
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theDepth < 8)
|
||
|
clutNumber += (Labels << 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the clut and record it and its index in theBlock.
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = theGlobals->colorTables[clutNumber];
|
||
|
theBlock->clutNumber = clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theDevice will be NULL if we are plotting to a printer or to pict. If so,
|
||
|
// we don't do any checks.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!theDevice)
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// We get the DeviceCheck structure corresponding to the device we're checking. If GetDeviceCheck
|
||
|
// returns NULL, it means that the caller is plotting to an off-screen GDevice (which is OK and will
|
||
|
// work). We won't have any information cached for such a device so we call CheckClut immediately.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theCheck = GetDeviceCheck(theDevice, theGlobals))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// get clutNumber into the 0-31 range and set theCheckMap and theResult to either the disabled
|
||
|
// or non-disabled check bit-maps (See GetDeviceCheck above for a general description of
|
||
|
// of these bit-maps)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (clutNumber >= ((Labels * Sets) >> 1))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
clutNumber -= ((Labels * Sets) >> 1);
|
||
|
theCheckMap = &(theCheck->disabledCheckMask);
|
||
|
theResult = &(theCheck->disabledCheckResults);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theCheckMap = &(theCheck->checkMask);
|
||
|
theResult = &(theCheck->checkResults);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// create a one-bit mask to check against the bit-maps
|
||
|
|
||
|
clutMask = 1 << clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the clut has never been checked against this device, update theCheckMap, call CheckClut
|
||
|
// and record the result.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!((*theCheckMap) & clutMask))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
(*theCheckMap) |= clutMask;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (CheckClut(theBlock))
|
||
|
(*theResult) |= clutMask;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
(*theResult) &= ~clutMask;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the result of the check was that this clut cannot be well-represented on this device,
|
||
|
// return false
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!((*theResult) & clutMask))
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return CheckClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __GetLabel is used to get information about the system labels. It is called by the
|
||
|
// trap dispatcher to implement the public GetLabel call. labelNumber specifies which
|
||
|
// label we are querying. labelColor and labelString are buffers into which store the
|
||
|
// label's RGB value and text, respectively. Either labelColor or labelString can be
|
||
|
// NULL to indicate that no information is required about the color or the text.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __GetLabel(short labelNumber, RGBColor *labelColor,
|
||
|
Str255 labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if labelNumber is out of range we return an error
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((labelNumber < 0) || (labelNumber > 7))
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get a pointer to the global parameter block hanging off of ExpandMem
|
||
|
|
||
|
theGlobals = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we don't have color QuickDraw, the global parameter block will not
|
||
|
// contain any label color information. (Should this return an error?)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor && HaveCQD())
|
||
|
*labelColor = theGlobals->labelColors[labelNumber];
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Handle aHandle = theGlobals->labelStrings[labelNumber];
|
||
|
LoadResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (ResErr)
|
||
|
return ResErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)(*aHandle), (Ptr)labelString, (long)(**aHandle) + 1);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// InvalLabelCluts is called by SetLabel to purge all the icon-plotting cluts associated with a
|
||
|
// label whose color has been changed
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define EightBitNonSelected 0
|
||
|
#define EightBitSelected 1
|
||
|
#define FourBitNonSelected (Labels * 2)
|
||
|
#define FourBitSelected (FourBitNonSelected + 1)
|
||
|
#define DisabledEightBitNonSelected ((Labels * Sets) / 2)
|
||
|
#define DisabledEightBitSelected (DisabledEightBitNonSelected + 1)
|
||
|
#define DisabledFourBitNonSelected (DisabledEightBitNonSelected + (Labels * 2))
|
||
|
#define DisabledFourBitSelected (DisabledFourBitNonSelected + 1)
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void InvalLabelCluts(short labelNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
CTabHandle *clutPtr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get a pointer to the unselected, non-disabled, 8-bit CTabHandle for this label in the
|
||
|
// global array of icon-plotting cluts and purge it.
|
||
|
clutPtr = &(((GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts())->colorTables[labelNumber << 1]);
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*clutPtr + EightBitNonSelected));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 8-bit, selected clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + EightBitSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit non-selected clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + FourBitNonSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit selected clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + FourBitSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 8-bit, non-selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledEightBitNonSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 8-bit, selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledEightBitSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit, non-selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledFourBitNonSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit, selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledFourBitSelected)));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __SetLabel is used to get information about the system labels. It is called through the
|
||
|
// trap dispatcher to implement the GetLabel call, which is exported but private. labelNumber
|
||
|
// specifies which label we are modifying. labelColor and labelString are buffers containing the
|
||
|
// label's RGB value and text, respectively. Either labelColor or labelString can be
|
||
|
// NULL to indicate that the color or text is not to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __SetLabel(short labelNumber, RGBColor *labelColor,
|
||
|
Str255 labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals;
|
||
|
Handle aHandle;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the labelNumber is out of range, return a paramErr. Note that the range of valid
|
||
|
// label numbers is different for __SetLabel than for __GetLabel. Label 0 cannot be
|
||
|
// changed and is always black with text "None".
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((labelNumber < 1) || (labelNumber > 7))
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If labelColor is specified and the global data structure contains color information,
|
||
|
// set the label value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor && HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// Update the list of label colors in memory
|
||
|
|
||
|
theGlobals = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
theGlobals->labelColors[labelNumber] = *labelColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Update the label color in the system file
|
||
|
|
||
|
aHandle = GetResource('rgb ', labelColorBase + labelNumber);
|
||
|
*((RGBColor *)(*aHandle)) = *labelColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
HNoPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
ChangedResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
WriteResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
HPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Invalidate cluts associated with labelNumber
|
||
|
InvalLabelCluts(labelNumber);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is a label string to set…
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char size = *labelString + 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the string is larger than a Str32, truncate it
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (size > 32)
|
||
|
size = 32;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// update the string in memory.
|
||
|
|
||
|
theGlobals = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
aHandle = theGlobals->labelStrings[labelNumber];
|
||
|
LoadResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)labelString, *aHandle, (long)size);
|
||
|
**aHandle = size-1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// update the system file
|
||
|
|
||
|
HNoPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
ChangedResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
WriteResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
HPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
UpdateResFile(0);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// These two routines are used as call-backs for PlotIconGeneric to implement
|
||
|
// PlotIconHandle, PlotSICNHandle
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromICON(long data, IconType theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theIcon == largeIcon1)
|
||
|
return ((Handle)data);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromSICN(long data, IconType theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if ((theIcon == smallIcon1) || (theIcon == miniIcon1))
|
||
|
return ((Handle)data);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// These two routines are called through the trap dispatcher to implement the public
|
||
|
// calls PlotIconHandle and PlotSICNHandle. NOTE: It was my intention to move these
|
||
|
// and their respective call-backs to IconUtils.a for speed and size efficiency.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __PlotIconHandle(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
Handle theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
return PlotIconGeneric(theRect, align, transform, (long)theIcon, FromICON, false);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __PlotSICNHandle(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
Handle theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
return PlotIconGeneric(theRect, align, transform, (long)theIcon, FromSICN, false);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The QuickDraw.h definition of a CIcon includes a one-byte array at the end as a place-holder
|
||
|
// for the variable-sized mask data. This is a CIcon definition that includes only the fixed-size
|
||
|
// data for a sizeof() operator.
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
PixMap iconPMap; /*the icon's pixMap*/
|
||
|
BitMap iconMask; /*the icon's mask*/
|
||
|
BitMap iconBMap; /*the icon's bitMap*/
|
||
|
Handle iconData; /*the icon's data*/
|
||
|
} myCIcon;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// SetupParamBlockForCIcon initializes a parameter block for a true CIcon. It is called by
|
||
|
// __PlotCIconHandle after the theBlock has its theRect, userProc, theTransform, theLabel
|
||
|
// selected and dontDraw fields initialized. On exit theBlock is setup to be called by
|
||
|
// PlotTheCIcon (See below).
|
||
|
|
||
|
void SetupParamBlockForCIcon(IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// the userProc field is used to hold a pointer to the locked CIcon structure
|
||
|
CIconPtr iconPtr = (CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc);
|
||
|
|
||
|
short height = iconPtr->iconMask.bounds.bottom - iconPtr->iconMask.bounds.top;
|
||
|
unsigned long maskDataSize = (iconPtr->iconMask.rowBytes * height);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// oneBitImageHandle is a Handle which we will set up to take the place of the one-bit
|
||
|
// member of an icon suite. We will be setting up maskMap to point to the mask data
|
||
|
// within the CIcon itself, so we only need to make oneBitImageHandle as big as the
|
||
|
// one-bit image data.
|
||
|
Handle oneBitImageHandle = NewHandle(maskDataSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theOneBitData points to the one-bit data (one-bit image and mask) for this CIcon.
|
||
|
// oneBitPtr is the beginning of the one-bit image data. It is initialized to theOneBitData
|
||
|
// because it is legal to omit the one-bit image data from a CIcon, in which case we use
|
||
|
// the mask as the one-bit data.
|
||
|
unsigned char *theOneBitData = (unsigned char *)(iconPtr->iconMaskData),
|
||
|
*oneBitPtr = theOneBitData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
RgnHandle maskRgn = NewRgn();
|
||
|
GrafPtr curPort = myGetPort();
|
||
|
|
||
|
HLock(oneBitImageHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there is one bit-data, we point oneBitPtr to it. Otherwise, we leave it pointing
|
||
|
// to the mask data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->userData > (sizeof(myCIcon) + maskDataSize))
|
||
|
oneBitPtr += maskDataSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy the one-bit image data to the simulated one-bit suite entry and point the theMask
|
||
|
// field in the IconParamBlock to point at it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)oneBitPtr, *oneBitImageHandle, maskDataSize);
|
||
|
theBlock->theMask = oneBitImageHandle;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy the bounds and rowBytes information from the CIcon's iconMask into theBlock->maskMap
|
||
|
// and point the baseAddr field to the mask data within the CIcon
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)(&(iconPtr->iconMask)), (Ptr)(&(theBlock->maskMap)), sizeof(BitMap));
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)theOneBitData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy all the PixMap information from the CIcon into the PixMap within theBlock and set
|
||
|
// the theData field to point to the color data from the CIcon.
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)(&(iconPtr->iconPMap)), (Ptr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), sizeof(PixMap));
|
||
|
theBlock->theData = iconPtr->iconData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// We use BitMapToRegion to generate the mask region used in doing transforms, etc.
|
||
|
// From this region we also derive our boundary information. userData is overloaded for
|
||
|
// CIcons to contain the handle to the mask region, since unlike icon suites, this region
|
||
|
// is generated once as opposed to when needed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
BitMapToRegion(maskRgn, &(theBlock->maskMap));
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary = (*maskRgn)->rgnBBox;
|
||
|
theBlock->userData = (long)maskRgn;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Initialize miscelaneous fields for plotting
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->useCopyMask = !((curPort->grafProcs) || (curPort->picSave));
|
||
|
theBlock->dstMap = &(curPort->portBits);
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.pixelSize = 0;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
theBlock->rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->useRegions = true; // we don't have any choice with CIcon's
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// myColorTable is a ColorTable with only the fixed-sized portion for a sizeof() operator
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long ctSeed; /*unique identifier for table*/
|
||
|
short ctFlags; /*high bit: 0 = PixMap; 1 = device*/
|
||
|
short ctSize; /*number of entries in CTTable*/
|
||
|
} myColorTable;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CopyClut is called by GetCIconClut to create a clut that is the same as input clut but
|
||
|
// padded to the depth of the pixMap data to which it belongs. Thus a 5-entry clut for a
|
||
|
// 4-bit data pixMap would be padded to 16 entries. If a clut needs padding, the entries
|
||
|
// not specified are set to a ramp between white and black. This is to simulate the fact
|
||
|
// that relative colors in a CIcon are assigned to a ramp between foreGround and backGround.
|
||
|
// Since we always set foreGround to black and backGround to white, this will have the desired effect.
|
||
|
|
||
|
CTabHandle CopyClut(CTabHandle theClut, short depth)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long specArraySize = sizeof(ColorSpec) << depth; // size of the CSpecArray in new clut
|
||
|
CTabHandle theNewClut = (CTabHandle)NewHandle(sizeof(myColorTable) + specArraySize);
|
||
|
CTabPtr oldClutPtr = *theClut,
|
||
|
newClutPtr = *theNewClut;
|
||
|
short newClutEntries = (1 << depth) - 1, // ctSize of new clut
|
||
|
oldClutEntries = oldClutPtr->ctSize; // ctSize of old clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
newClutPtr->ctSeed = GetCTSeed(); // get unique seed
|
||
|
newClutPtr->ctSize = newClutEntries; // initialize ctSize entry
|
||
|
newClutPtr->ctFlags = oldClutPtr->ctFlags; // copy flags from old clut to new
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy common data between the two cluts (yeah, and some garbage as well)
|
||
|
BlockMoveData((Ptr)(oldClutPtr->ctTable), (Ptr)(newClutPtr->ctTable), specArraySize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is no difference in CSpecArray size, we are done now.
|
||
|
if (newClutEntries > oldClutEntries)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec tempColor,
|
||
|
*theTable = newClutPtr->ctTable;
|
||
|
|
||
|
*((long *)(&(tempColor.rgb))) = 0; // set the last entry to black
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.blue = 0;
|
||
|
tempColor.value = newClutEntries;
|
||
|
theTable[newClutEntries] = tempColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
++oldClutEntries; // we are now looking one entry beyond the
|
||
|
// last entry in the old clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (newClutEntries > oldClutEntries) // Is there more than one extra spot to fill?
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long index;
|
||
|
unsigned short increment = 0xffff / (newClutEntries - oldClutEntries),
|
||
|
value = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
*((long *)(&(tempColor.rgb))) = -1; // set entry after the last specified to white
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.blue = 0xffff;
|
||
|
tempColor.value = oldClutEntries;
|
||
|
theTable[oldClutEntries] = tempColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// fill all intermediate entries with an evenly spaced ramp from white to black
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (index = newClutEntries - 1; index > oldClutEntries; --index)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
value += increment;
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.red = value;
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.green = value;
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.blue = value;
|
||
|
tempColor.value = index;
|
||
|
theTable[index] = tempColor;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return theNewClut;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the CIcon couterpart to IconGetClut. It is called by PlotTheCIcon (Below) to get
|
||
|
// the appropriate clut to use for plotting to deep devices.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void GetCIconClut(IconParamBlock *theBlock, GDHandle theDevice, short flags)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
CTabHandle theClut = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.pmTable;
|
||
|
short clutDepth = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.pixelSize,
|
||
|
clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy the CIcon's clut and pad if necessary
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = CopyClut(theClut, clutDepth);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// clutNumber is either set to the label number or zero if we're on a gray-scale device.
|
||
|
// MakeClut (See above) uses this value differently for CIcons than for icon suites
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theDevice && (!(flags & 0x1)))
|
||
|
clutNumber = 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
clutNumber = theBlock->theLabel;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->clutNumber = clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// process the copied clut appropriately for our device, transform and label
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotTheCIcon is called directly by __PlotCIconHandle (Below) or indirectly via DeviceLoop.
|
||
|
// It is responsible for deciding whether the color icon data will be plotted or the one-bit data.
|
||
|
// When PlotTheCIcon is called from DeviceLoop, we make use of DeviceLoop's setting up of visRgn to
|
||
|
// clip the image appropriately. (In PlotTheIcon, we do our own clipping and only use DeviceLoop
|
||
|
// to iterate through the active devices.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotTheCIcon(short screenDepth,
|
||
|
short flags,
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice,
|
||
|
IconParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->screenDepth = screenDepth;
|
||
|
theBlock->theDevice = theDevice;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if our monitor is deeper than four bits, or if our monitor is four bits and our icon is
|
||
|
// not selected or disabled, then we can plot the deep data. Otherwise we plot the one-bit
|
||
|
// data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((screenDepth > 4) && (theBlock->theTransform != ttOpen)) ||
|
||
|
((screenDepth == 4) && (!(theBlock->selected)) && (!(theBlock->theTransform & ttDisabled))))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.pixelSize; // set up dataDepth for PlotDeep
|
||
|
GetCIconClut(theBlock, theDevice, flags); // get a processed copy of the clut
|
||
|
PlotDeep(theBlock); // plot the icon
|
||
|
DisposHandle((Handle)(theBlock->theClut)); // dispose of our copy of the clut
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = 1;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
PlotShallow(theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __PlotCIconHandle is called through the trap dispatcher to implement the PlotCIconHandle call. It allows
|
||
|
// a CIcon to be plotted, using the modifiers for an icon suite.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __PlotCIconHandle(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
CIconHandle theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
char iconState;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CIcon's don't exist on non-color machines.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!HaveCQD())
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Since PlotCIconHandle is slower than PlotCIcon, we fall through to PlotCIcon when there is no alignment
|
||
|
// or transform. For visual consistancy, we set fore and back colors to black and white, because PlotDeep
|
||
|
// (See above) does that before plotting deep data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((!align) && (!transform))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
ForeColor(blackColor);
|
||
|
BackColor(whiteColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
PlotCIcon(theRect, theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Lock down the CIcon while we plot it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
iconState = HGetState((Handle)theIcon);
|
||
|
HLock((Handle)theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// set up for call to SetupParamBlockForCIcon
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theGroup = aCIcon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = GetHandleSize((Handle)theIcon); // Going into SetupParamBlockForCIcon, userData is the size of theIcon,
|
||
|
// coming out, it is the mask region.
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = (IconRetriever)(*theIcon);
|
||
|
theBlock.theTransform = transform & transformMask;
|
||
|
theBlock.theLabel = (transform & labelMask) >> labelShift;
|
||
|
theBlock.selected = transform & ttSelected;
|
||
|
theBlock.dontDraw = false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetupParamBlockForCIcon(&theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// do alignment, if any
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// map the region to the size of the destination rect
|
||
|
|
||
|
AdjustRgn((RgnHandle)(theBlock.userData),
|
||
|
&(theBlock.maskMap.bounds),
|
||
|
&(theBlock.theRect));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're plotting to a BitMap as opposed to a PixMap, we call PlotTheCIcon directly with a depth of 1.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, we need to to decide more carefully how to plot.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock.dstMap->rowBytes < 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = (GlobalIconDataPtr) GetExpandMemIconCluts();
|
||
|
GDHandle theScreen;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're assuming we're plotting to a given monitor, we call PlotTheCIcon directly for that
|
||
|
// monitor. Otherwise, we call DeviceLoop and let PlotTheCIcon decide for itself how to plot
|
||
|
// the data on monitor-by-monitor basis.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theScreen = theGlobals->virtualScreen)
|
||
|
PlotTheCIcon((*((*theScreen)->gdPMap))->pixelSize, 0, theScreen, &theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DeviceLoop((RgnHandle)(theBlock.userData),
|
||
|
(DeviceLoopDrawingProcPtr)PlotTheCIcon,
|
||
|
(long)(&theBlock), 0);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotTheCIcon(1, 1, NULL, &theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// restore the handle state of the CIconHandle
|
||
|
|
||
|
HSetState((Handle)theIcon, iconState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// dispose of the mask region
|
||
|
|
||
|
DisposeRgn((RgnHandle)(theBlock.userData));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// dispose of the one-bit data handle we created in SetupParamBlockForCIcon
|
||
|
|
||
|
DisposHandle((Handle)(theBlock.theMask));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#else
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __ICONS__
|
||
|
#include <Icons.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __ERRORS__
|
||
|
#include <Errors.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __QUICKDRAW__
|
||
|
#include <QuickDraw.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __PALETTES__
|
||
|
#include <Palettes.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#include <IconUtilsPriv.h>
|
||
|
#include <PalettesPriv.h>
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __MEMORY__
|
||
|
#include <Memory.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __RESOURCES__
|
||
|
#include <Resources.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __TRAPS__
|
||
|
#include <Traps.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __SYSEQU__
|
||
|
#include <SysEqu.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __OSUTILS__
|
||
|
#include <OSUtils.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
#ifndef __QDOFFSCREEN__
|
||
|
#include <QDOffScreen.h>
|
||
|
#endif
|
||
|
|
||
|
GrafPtr myGetPort() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x2255, // MOVEA.L (A5), A1 ; Get Pointer to globals
|
||
|
0x2011 // MOVE.L (A1), D0 ; Return current grafport
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
ConstPatternParam GetBlack() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x70F0, // MOVEQ.L black, D0
|
||
|
0xD095 // ADD.L GrafGlobals(A5), D0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
ConstPatternParam GetHalfGray() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x70E8, // MOVEQ.L gray, D0
|
||
|
0xD095 // ADD.L GrafGlobals(A5), D0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
ConstPatternParam GetLightGray() =
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
0x70E0, // MOVEQ.L ltGray, D0
|
||
|
0xD095 // ADD.L GrafGlobals(A5), D0
|
||
|
};
|
||
|
|
||
|
#pragma parameter __D0 myGetHandleSize (__A0)
|
||
|
long myGetHandleSize(Handle theHandle) = _GetHandleSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define MemErr (*((short *)0x220))
|
||
|
#define ResErr (*((short *)0xA60))
|
||
|
#define DeviceList (*((GDHandle *)0x8A8))
|
||
|
#define TheGDevice (*((GDHandle *)0xCC8))
|
||
|
#define ROM85 (*(unsigned short *) 0x28E)
|
||
|
#define HaveCQD() (ROM85 <= 0x3fff)
|
||
|
|
||
|
#pragma parameter __D0 ShortMul (__D1,__D0)
|
||
|
long ShortMul(unsigned short x, unsigned short y) = 0xc0c1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
#pragma parameter __D0 ShortDiv (__D0, __D1)
|
||
|
short ShortDiv(unsigned long x, unsigned short y) = 0x80c1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define MakeLong(aThing) (*((long *)(&(aThing))))
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This external table is defined in IconUtils.a
|
||
|
|
||
|
extern ResType typeTable[IconSpace];
|
||
|
|
||
|
// typedef for call-back used internally for routines like PlotIconGeneric, HitTestIconGeneric, etc.
|
||
|
typedef Handle (*IconRetriever)(long data, IconType theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataHandle GetGlobalHandle();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the folowing is the definition of the parameter block used throughout the code
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
PixMap dataMap; // PixMap (or BitMap) structure used for icon image data
|
||
|
BitMap maskMap; // BitMap used for icon mask data
|
||
|
BitMapPtr dstMap; // Pointer to the destination BitMap
|
||
|
Handle theMask, // Handle to one-bit data (usually with mask appended)
|
||
|
theData; // Handle to 4 or 8 bit icon image data
|
||
|
Rect theRect, // destination rectangle (as modified by alignment)
|
||
|
boundary; // boundary of non-zero data within the maskMap bounds.
|
||
|
short rowBytes; // basic rowBytes of data (2 or 4)
|
||
|
unsigned short theTransform, // transform broken out from transform code
|
||
|
theLabel, // label broken out from transform code
|
||
|
selected, // selected state broken out from transform code
|
||
|
dontDraw, // flag which is set to true for LoadIconCache, cuts operation short before drawing
|
||
|
onScreen, // true if the icon is being drawn to a video device, false if printing or offscreen destination
|
||
|
screenDepth, // used to record the depth of the device we'll be drawing to
|
||
|
dataDepth, // used to record the depth of the data we'll be drawing
|
||
|
clutNumber; // index into an array of CTabHandles, specifies CLUT we will use with dataMap
|
||
|
Boolean useRegions; // true if we will use regions to perform transforms, false normally
|
||
|
IconType theGroup; // size category of icon we are using (mini, small or large) also used to indicate a cicn
|
||
|
long userData; // data for icon-data-getting call back
|
||
|
IconRetriever userProc; // ProcPtr to icon-data-getting call back
|
||
|
CTabHandle theClut; // handle to CLUT we will use with dataMap
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice; // device we are currently drawing to or NULL if black and white or if single device
|
||
|
unsigned long maskBuffer[32]; // buffer in which we store masks we create for one reason or another
|
||
|
} ParamBlock;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PerformAlignment offsets theBlock->theRect to cause the icon to have the alignment specified by the caller
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PerformAlignment(ParamBlock *theBlock, short align)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short offsetx,
|
||
|
offsety;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Rect *theRect = &(theBlock->theRect),
|
||
|
theBoundary = theBlock->boundary;
|
||
|
|
||
|
MapRect(&theBoundary, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), theRect);
|
||
|
|
||
|
switch (align & 0xC)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
case atHorizontalCenter:
|
||
|
offsetx = ((theRect->right + theRect->left) - (theBoundary.right + theBoundary.left)) >> 1;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atLeft:
|
||
|
offsetx = theRect->left - theBoundary.left;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atRight:
|
||
|
offsetx = theRect->right - theBoundary.right;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
default:
|
||
|
offsetx = 0;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
switch (align & 0x3)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
case atVerticalCenter:
|
||
|
offsety = ((theRect->bottom + theRect->top) - (theBoundary.bottom + theBoundary.top)) >> 1;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atTop:
|
||
|
offsety = theRect->top - theBoundary.top;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
case atBottom:
|
||
|
offsety = theRect->bottom - theBoundary.bottom;
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
default:
|
||
|
offsety = 0;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
OffsetRect(theRect, offsetx, offsety);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following routines are used to create regions from mask BitMap's for IconToRgn-type calls and
|
||
|
// for hit-testing and transforms when an icon is draw larger than 32-bits. They are faster than the
|
||
|
// more general BitMapRgn code because they are optimized for a bitMap no greater that a longword in
|
||
|
// width.
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define TempRgnBufferSize 100
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal Boolean AddBufferToRgn(RgnHandle theRgn, unsigned short *rgnBuffer, unsigned short *regionPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long incrementSize = (unsigned long)regionPtr - (unsigned long)rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
short rgnSize = (*theRgn)->rgnSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetHandleSize((Handle)theRgn, rgnSize + incrementSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (MemErr)
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)rgnBuffer, (Ptr)(((unsigned char *)(*theRgn)) + rgnSize), incrementSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnSize += incrementSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void MaskRgn(RgnHandle theRgn,
|
||
|
ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char *data = theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr; // This may or may not be locked down
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned short rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes,
|
||
|
rowIndex,
|
||
|
rgnBuffer[TempRgnBufferSize],
|
||
|
*regionPtr = rgnBuffer,
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long sizeMask = (rowBytes > 2) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 0xFFFF0000,
|
||
|
lastRow = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// initialize output region
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnSize = sizeof(Region);
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnBBox = theBlock->boundary;
|
||
|
|
||
|
data += ShortMul((unsigned short)rowBytes, (unsigned short)(theBlock->boundary.top)); // Point to the top of real data
|
||
|
|
||
|
// find the inversion points row-by-row
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (rowIndex = theBlock->boundary.top;
|
||
|
rowIndex <= theBlock->boundary.bottom;
|
||
|
++rowIndex, data += rowBytes)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long thisRow,
|
||
|
inversion;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (rowIndex != theBlock->boundary.bottom)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
thisRow = *((unsigned long *)data);
|
||
|
inversion = thisRow ^ lastRow; // inversion is a bit-map difference between this row and the last
|
||
|
lastRow = thisRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
inversion = lastRow; // To finish the region, we compare the last row to nothing (all zeros)
|
||
|
|
||
|
inversion &= sizeMask; // Take only the significant data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is any difference between this row and the last, we describe this difference as a set of inversion points
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (inversion)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short columnIndex = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// I'm about to add two words to the region (the row index and the first column index, so I make one check to see
|
||
|
// if I've got two words left in my buffer. If I don't, I dump my temporary buffer to the output region and free
|
||
|
// up the temp buffer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (spaceLeftInBuffer < 2)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = rowIndex;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// find the first inversion point (may be the first point in the row)
|
||
|
|
||
|
while (!(inversion & 0x80000000))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
++columnIndex;
|
||
|
inversion <<= 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// record the first inversion point.
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = columnIndex++;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// update our gas guage.
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer -= 2;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// find and record all subsequent inversion points
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long check = inversion & 0xC0000000;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (check && (check != 0xC0000000))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// check if I need to flush my temp buffer
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!spaceLeftInBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = columnIndex;
|
||
|
--spaceLeftInBuffer;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
columnIndex++;
|
||
|
inversion <<= 1;
|
||
|
} while (inversion);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// cap off the row with a row-capping marker.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!spaceLeftInBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = 0x7FFF;
|
||
|
--spaceLeftInBuffer;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!spaceLeftInBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
regionPtr = rgnBuffer;
|
||
|
spaceLeftInBuffer = TempRgnBufferSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
*regionPtr++ = 0x7FFF; // cap off the rgn
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the region is purely rectangular, minimize it and return it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((*theRgn)->rgnSize == sizeof(Region)) &&
|
||
|
(((unsigned long)regionPtr - (unsigned long)rgnBuffer) == 18) &&
|
||
|
(rgnBuffer[1] == rgnBuffer[5]) &&
|
||
|
(rgnBuffer[2] == rgnBuffer[6]))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
SetHandleSize((Handle)theRgn, sizeof(Region));
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Flush the remainder of the buffer to the region.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!AddBufferToRgn(theRgn, rgnBuffer, regionPtr))
|
||
|
goto error;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
error:
|
||
|
(*theRgn)->rgnSize = sizeof(Region);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
// Search utilities.
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
|
||
|
// GetBestData finds the best available data that is appropriate for the destination device.
|
||
|
// Initially, theBlock->dataDepth is set equal to the screen depth (by SetUpParamBlock). On
|
||
|
// exit, theData is set to the best available color data, theClut is set to the appropriate
|
||
|
// CLUT to use, and dataDepth is updated to reflect the depth of the output data. If no color
|
||
|
// data is available or appropriate, theData and theClut are set NULL and dataDepth is set to 1,
|
||
|
// all of which means that this is a one-bit plot. IconGetClut calls CheckClut to see if the clut
|
||
|
// of the specified depth fits into the current color environments. It returns false if it is not,
|
||
|
// causing us to degrade to a smaller bit-depth.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void GetBestData(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long theData = theBlock->userData,
|
||
|
IconGetClut(ParamBlock *, short);
|
||
|
|
||
|
short checkDepth = 8,
|
||
|
whichIcon = theBlock->theGroup + largeIcon8; // whichIcon is initialized to the code
|
||
|
// for the deepest data in our size group
|
||
|
|
||
|
long IconGetClut(ParamBlock *, short);
|
||
|
|
||
|
IconRetriever theProc = theBlock->userProc;
|
||
|
void MakeClut(ParamBlock *);
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if ((theBlock->dataDepth >= checkDepth)
|
||
|
&& IconGetClut(theBlock, checkDepth)
|
||
|
&& (theBlock->theData = (*theProc)(theData, whichIcon)))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = checkDepth;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the the clut returned by IconGetClut is purged, build a new one
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(*(theBlock->theClut)))
|
||
|
MakeClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
checkDepth -= 4;
|
||
|
--whichIcon;
|
||
|
} while (checkDepth);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = 1;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// ChooseBestSize maps a destination rectangle size to an icon size category.
|
||
|
|
||
|
short ChooseBestSize(const Rect *theRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
int width = theRect->right - theRect->left,
|
||
|
height = theRect->bottom - theRect->top;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((width >= 32) || (height >= 32))
|
||
|
return largeIcon1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (height > 12)
|
||
|
return smallIcon1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return miniIcon1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define FIXED(a) (long)(((a)<<16))
|
||
|
#define THEPIXMAP ((PixMapPtr)theBlock) // only works if the pixmap is the first element
|
||
|
|
||
|
// SetUpPixMap initializes the necessary fields of dataMap for a color plot.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void SetUpPixMap(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned short depth = theBlock->dataDepth;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->baseAddr = *(theBlock->theData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we use the pixelSize field to indicate whether or not we already have the dataMap
|
||
|
// initialized for a color plot, and if so to what depth.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (THEPIXMAP->pixelSize == depth)
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pmVersion = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->packType = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->packSize = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->hRes = FIXED(72);
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->vRes = FIXED(72);
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pixelType = 0;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->cmpCount = 1;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->planeBytes = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pixelSize = depth;
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->cmpSize = depth;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the icon is a true CIcon, the rowBytes could be any arbitrary value. Otherwise,
|
||
|
// we can calculate the proper PixMap rowBytes value from the basic rowBytes and the
|
||
|
// depth.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theGroup != aCIcon)
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->rowBytes = ShortMul((unsigned short)(theBlock->rowBytes), depth) | 0x8000;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->rowBytes = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
THEPIXMAP->pmTable = theBlock->theClut;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
// IconSuite Manipulation routines.
|
||
|
//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __NewIconSuite is called directly by the dispatcher to implement the NewIconSuite call.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __NewIconSuite(IconSuiteHandle *theSuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*theSuite = (IconSuiteHandle)NewHandleClear(sizeof(IconSuite));
|
||
|
return MemErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __MakeIconCache is called directly by the dispatcher to implement the MakeIconCache call.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __MakeIconCache(IconCacheHandle *theHandle,
|
||
|
IconGetter makeIcon,
|
||
|
void *yourDataPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconCacheHandle theCache;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(theCache = (IconCacheHandle)NewHandleClear(sizeof(IconCache))))
|
||
|
return MemErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*theCache)->theSuite.type = CACHE; // set the suite type to indicate that this is a cache
|
||
|
(*theCache)->userPtr = yourDataPtr; // install the call-back and the data.
|
||
|
(*theCache)->userMethod = makeIcon;
|
||
|
|
||
|
*theHandle = theCache;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// EditIconSuite is called by __AddIconToSuite and __GetIconFromSuite (defined in IconUtils.a)
|
||
|
// If isAdd is false, EditIconSuite assumes refCon is a pointer to a Handle and returns the
|
||
|
// entry of type theType from theSuite (possibly NULL). If isAdd is true, the value in refcon
|
||
|
// is added to theSuite in the slot for data of type theType.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr EditIconSuite(long refCon, // Handle or referenct to handle of icon data
|
||
|
IconSuiteHandle theSuite,
|
||
|
ResType theType,
|
||
|
long isAdd)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Handle *theSlot = (*theSuite)->table;
|
||
|
long theEnd = (long)(theSlot + IconSpace);
|
||
|
ResType *theTable = typeTable;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theType == *theTable++)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (isAdd)
|
||
|
*theSlot = (Handle)refCon;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
*((Handle *)refCon) = *theSlot;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
} while ((long)(++theSlot) < theEnd);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __ForEachIconDo is called by the trap dispatcher to implement the ForEachIconDo call. The action
|
||
|
// call-back is called for every member of theSuite specified by selector (See ERS for selector values).
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __ForEachIconDo(IconSuiteHandle theSuite,
|
||
|
unsigned long selector,
|
||
|
IconAction action,
|
||
|
void *yourDataPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Handle *theTable = (Handle *)((*theSuite)->table);
|
||
|
long end = (long)(theTable + IconSpace); // there are more data registers than address
|
||
|
ResType *theTypes = typeTable;
|
||
|
OSErr rval = noErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
char theState = HGetState((Handle)theSuite);
|
||
|
HLock((Handle) theSuite);
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short i = IconSizeSpace;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (selector & 0x00000001)
|
||
|
if (rval = (*action)(*theTypes, theTable, yourDataPtr))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theTable++;
|
||
|
theTypes++;
|
||
|
selector >>= 1;
|
||
|
} while (--i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
selector >>= (8 - IconSizeSpace);
|
||
|
} while (theTable < (Handle *)end);
|
||
|
|
||
|
out:
|
||
|
HSetState((Handle) theSuite, theState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the call back used with ForEachIconDo to implement the __GetIconSuite
|
||
|
// call below. A more sophisticated call-back could be used to implement a
|
||
|
// Get1IconSuite or to ensure that GetIconSuite only got icons from a single
|
||
|
// file. A user could do this kind of thing by rewriting GetIconSuite with
|
||
|
// their own call-back.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr GetIconFromResource(ResType theType, Handle *theIcon, void *yourDataPtr)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*theIcon = GetResource(theType, (short)yourDataPtr);
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the GetIconSuite call. The selector allows only specific members of the
|
||
|
// suite to be asked for.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __GetIconSuite(Handle *theHandle, short theID, unsigned long selector)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (__NewIconSuite((IconSuiteHandle *)theHandle))
|
||
|
return MemErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
__ForEachIconDo((IconSuiteHandle)(*theHandle), selector, GetIconFromResource, (void *)theID);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the SetSuiteLabel call. This specifies a default label for a suite
|
||
|
// which is used if no label is specified by the transform. Yes, this is currently used.
|
||
|
// Namely, by the process manager for the Apple Menu.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __SetSuiteLabel(IconSuiteHandle theSuite, unsigned short theLabel)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theLabel > 7)
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theLabel <<= labelShift;
|
||
|
(*theSuite)->label = theLabel;
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the GetSuiteLabel. Just for completeness.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal short __GetSuiteLabel(IconSuiteHandle theSuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
return (((*theSuite)->label) >> labelShift);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the call back used with ForEachIconDo to implement DisposIconSuite. An icon
|
||
|
// is only disposed if it is not a resource.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr Disposer(ResType , Handle *theIcon, void *)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (*theIcon && (HomeResFile(*theIcon) == -1))
|
||
|
DisposHandle(*theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
*theIcon = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Implements the DisposeIconSuite call. disposeData indicates whether an attempt should
|
||
|
// be made to dispose of the data in the suite. Only non-resource handles will be disposed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __DisposeIconSuite(IconSuiteHandle theSuite, Boolean disposeData)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (disposeData)
|
||
|
(void)__ForEachIconDo(theSuite, svAllAvailableData, Disposer, NULL);
|
||
|
|
||
|
DisposHandle((Handle)theSuite);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return MemErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// These are the call-backs used with all the generic routines (PlotIconGeneric, HitTestIconGeneric and
|
||
|
// IconToRgnGeneric) to implement PlotIconID, PlotIconMethod, PlotIconSuite, HitTestIconID, etc. etc.
|
||
|
// FromMethod and FromResource are defined in IconUtils.a
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromMethod(long data, IconType theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromResource(long data, IconType theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromSuite(long data, IconType theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconCachePtr theCache = *((IconCacheHandle)data);
|
||
|
Handle rval = theCache->theSuite.table[theIcon];
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if a suite is a cache (See Cache routines below) and we don't have any data, we call the user's
|
||
|
// call back to get some data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!rval && theCache->theSuite.type)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
IconGetter theProc = theCache->userMethod;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theProc)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rval = (*theProc)(typeTable[theIcon], theCache->userPtr);
|
||
|
(*((IconSuiteHandle)data))->table[theIcon] = rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// AdjustRgn checks the from and to rects and decides whether the region needs mapping,
|
||
|
// offsetting or nothing. It is defined in IconUtils.a and is called by DoRegionTransform
|
||
|
// and HitTestIconGeneric.
|
||
|
|
||
|
extern pascal void AdjustRgn(RgnHandle maskRgn, Rect *from, Rect *to);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// DoRegionTransform performs a transform using region operations. This will be called
|
||
|
// when the useRegions flag is true.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void DoRegionTransform(ParamBlock *theBlock, short theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RgnHandle patRgn;
|
||
|
Boolean isASuite = (theBlock->theGroup != aCIcon);
|
||
|
PenState saveState;
|
||
|
char maskState;
|
||
|
|
||
|
GetPenState(&saveState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we are not a true CIcon, we need to generate a region from the icon mask. The
|
||
|
// locking of theMask is redundant in the color case and extraneous in the case where
|
||
|
// we synthesize a mask but the complexity of determining exactly whether it needs to be done
|
||
|
// dosen't buy that much.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (isASuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
maskState = HGetState(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
HLock(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
patRgn = NewRgn();
|
||
|
MaskRgn(patRgn, theBlock);
|
||
|
AdjustRgn(patRgn, &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), &(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
patRgn = (RgnHandle)theBlock->userData; // This is used for true CIcon to hold a region equivalent
|
||
|
// to its mask (See SetupParamBlockForCIcon)
|
||
|
switch (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// makes an outline and fills it with a 25% gray pattern
|
||
|
|
||
|
case ttOpen:
|
||
|
FillRgn(patRgn, GetBlack());
|
||
|
InsetRgn(patRgn, 1, 1);
|
||
|
FillRgn(patRgn, GetLightGray());
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Or's over the data (already drawn) with a 25% gray pattern
|
||
|
|
||
|
case ttOffline:
|
||
|
PenPat(GetLightGray());
|
||
|
PenMode(patOr);
|
||
|
PaintRgn(patRgn);
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Bit-clears the already drawn data with a 50% pattern
|
||
|
|
||
|
case ttDisabled:
|
||
|
PenPat(GetHalfGray());
|
||
|
PenMode(patBic);
|
||
|
PaintRgn(patRgn);
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetPenState(&saveState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (isASuite)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
DisposeRgn(patRgn);
|
||
|
HSetState(theBlock->theMask, maskState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following routines are used by DoBitMapTransform to accomplish the various
|
||
|
// transform effects. They rely on the fact that the theBlock->maskMap describes
|
||
|
// exactly the countours of the shape they are transforming. This is guaranteed
|
||
|
// by PrescaleMask (See below)
|
||
|
|
||
|
// DoOutline takes the pre-scaled maskMap and OR's an outline of the icon
|
||
|
// over destination. It is used to implement the open transform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void DoOutline(BitMapPtr maskMap, unsigned long *destination)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char *source = (unsigned char *)(maskMap->baseAddr);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long dataMask = (unsigned long)(-1),
|
||
|
lastRow,
|
||
|
row,
|
||
|
nextRow,
|
||
|
destRow,
|
||
|
checkRow,
|
||
|
setMask;
|
||
|
|
||
|
short end = maskMap->bounds.bottom - 1,
|
||
|
i;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// data mask is used to mask off all but the bits belonging to one row of the mask map.
|
||
|
|
||
|
dataMask <<= (32 - maskMap->bounds.right);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// last row represents the row of mask data above the one we're analyzing. It is initialized
|
||
|
// to zero because logicly, there are zero bits outside the bounds of our maskMap.
|
||
|
|
||
|
lastRow = 0L;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// row is the row of mask data we are currently trying to hollow out.
|
||
|
|
||
|
row = *((unsigned long *)source) & dataMask;
|
||
|
source += maskMap->rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we march through the rows of our mask, hollowing our rows as we go. We only go as far
|
||
|
// as the row before the bottom-most row, since we are only interested in examining rows
|
||
|
// that are samwiched between other rows with data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 0; i < end; i++)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// destRow will be our hollowed out row. It is initialized to row since we don't know if it
|
||
|
// needs hollowing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
destRow = row;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// nextRow is the row below the one we are examining. We advance our source pointer here. We
|
||
|
// won't be advancing off the icon because we're stopping one row before the last.
|
||
|
|
||
|
nextRow = *((unsigned long *)source) & dataMask;
|
||
|
source += maskMap->rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if row has data above and below it, we examine its bits left-to-right. If any one bit has
|
||
|
// a one-bit to left of it, to the right of it, on top of it and below it, we turn that bit
|
||
|
// off in destRow. It works, really.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (destRow)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (lastRow && nextRow)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
setMask = 0x40000000;
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (checkRow = row; checkRow; checkRow <<= 1, setMask >>= 1)
|
||
|
if (((checkRow & 0xE0000000) == 0xE0000000) && (setMask & lastRow) && (setMask & nextRow))
|
||
|
destRow ^= setMask;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// here we OR the destRow with the destination data
|
||
|
|
||
|
*destination |= destRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// advance the destination pointer as well as lastRow and row.
|
||
|
|
||
|
++destination;
|
||
|
lastRow = row;
|
||
|
row = nextRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// nextRow now contains the data from the last row in the icon. It either has data, in which case
|
||
|
// it gets OR'd in its entirety, or it dosen't and we do nothing.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (nextRow)
|
||
|
*destination |= nextRow;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// ApplyPattern is used to either bitClear the data in theMap with a 50% pattern (for the disabled transform)
|
||
|
// or to OR the data with a 25% pattern (for offline and open).
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void ApplyPattern(BitMapPtr theMap, BitMapPtr theMask, Boolean bitClear)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long *mapData = (unsigned long *)(theMap->baseAddr);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned char *maskData = (unsigned char *)(theMask->baseAddr); // we know how wide this buffer is
|
||
|
short rowBytes = theMask->rowBytes,
|
||
|
end = theMask->bounds.bottom;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if (bitClear)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*mapData++ &= 0xAAAAAAAA;
|
||
|
*mapData++ &= 0x55555555;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*mapData++ |= (0x88888888 & *((unsigned long *)maskData));
|
||
|
maskData += rowBytes;
|
||
|
*mapData++ |= (0x22222222 & *((unsigned long *)maskData));
|
||
|
maskData += rowBytes;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
end -= 2;
|
||
|
} while (end);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
// DoBitMapTransform causes an icon to appear transformed (open, offline or disabled). If onePass is true,
|
||
|
// It means that we are plotting a one-bit icon and we want to combine the transform patterns with the
|
||
|
// icon data off-screen and plot it all at once. If onePass is false, it means we are plotting a color
|
||
|
// icon and that the color data has already been plotted.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void DoBitMapTransform(ParamBlock *theBlock, short theTransform, Boolean onePass)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
BitMap transformMap; // BitMap used for transform data.
|
||
|
unsigned long transformBuffer[32], // offscreen area where we will create transform data
|
||
|
*buffPtr = transformBuffer,
|
||
|
*endPtr = buffPtr + 32;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// IsNotPreScaled is true if we did not have to scale the mask prior to this point. We need to know this to decide
|
||
|
// whether to scale the data for one pass attempt and whether we should use CopyMask.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Boolean IsNotPreScaled = (MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom) == MakeLong(theBlock->dataMap.bounds.bottom));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// empty out the transformBuffer, since we are OR'ing data over it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
*buffPtr++ = 0L;
|
||
|
} while (buffPtr < endPtr);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// initialize transform BitMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
transformMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)transformBuffer;
|
||
|
transformMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
transformMap.bounds = theBlock->maskMap.bounds;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we are trying to do this plot in one pass, we copy the one-bit data into the transformBuffer. If the mask has
|
||
|
// not been prescaled, the image data data will not need scaling and we can just copy it into the buffer. (this will
|
||
|
// always be the case in the Finder since they prescale their old-style icons into different size categories) Otherwise,
|
||
|
// we will have to stretch the data into transform buffer;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (onePass && (theTransform != ttOpen))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (IsNotPreScaled)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short height = theBlock->dataMap.bounds.bottom;
|
||
|
unsigned char *theData = *(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
buffPtr = transformBuffer;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
*buffPtr++ = *((unsigned long *)theData);
|
||
|
theData += theBlock->rowBytes;
|
||
|
} while (--height);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else // use srcXor because we do not know the foreColor or backColor but we know the destination is all zeros
|
||
|
CopyBits((BitMapPtr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), &transformMap, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), &(transformMap.bounds), srcXor, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// OR in an outline of the mask if the transform is ttOpen
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttOpen)
|
||
|
DoOutline(&(theBlock->maskMap), transformBuffer);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the transform is ttDisabled, bit clear the data with a 50% gray. If it is ttOffline or ttOpen, OR the data with 25% gray
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
ApplyPattern(&transformMap, &(theBlock->maskMap), true);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
ApplyPattern(&transformMap, &(theBlock->maskMap), false);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// I'm putting this in a block to take advantage of register re-use
|
||
|
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Rect *maskRect = &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we're plotting a one-bit, transformed icon or if we're plotting an opened icon, we have all the
|
||
|
// data we need in the transform map and we'll try to render that in one shot (although we may have
|
||
|
// to put down the mask separately. See comments below). Otherwise, we have a color transform and
|
||
|
// we assume that the basic icon data has already been rendered and that we're just going to OR over it
|
||
|
// with our transform pattern.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (onePass || (theTransform == ttOpen))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// The choice of which rendering technique to use is based on three things. If you have don't have color
|
||
|
// QuickDraw, CopyMask dosen't stretch bits so you generally can't use it. If you're printing or plotting
|
||
|
// to an open PICT, again CopyMask won't work. If you're mask is pre-scaled, and therefore has different
|
||
|
// bounds than your data, CopyMask won't work (a bug). In general you want to try to use CopyMask because
|
||
|
// it goes down in one-pass and avoids any possible flashing. If you can't use it, you BitClear the mask
|
||
|
// and OR over it with data, which works regardless of fore and backGround colors.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD() && (theBlock->onScreen) && IsNotPreScaled)
|
||
|
CopyMask(&transformMap, &(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
CopyBits(&(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect), srcBic, NULL);
|
||
|
CopyBits(&transformMap, theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect), srcOr, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
CopyBits(&transformMap, theBlock->dstMap, maskRect, &(theBlock->theRect), srcOr, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Render is called by PlotDeep, PlotShallowBlackAndWhite and PlotShallowColor. It uses the same criterion described above
|
||
|
// to decide which rendering technique to use with the main icon image data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void Render(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Rect *destRect = &(theBlock->theRect);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD() && (theBlock->onScreen) && (MakeLong(theBlock->dataMap.bounds.bottom) == MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom)))
|
||
|
CopyMask((BitMapPtr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), &(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap,
|
||
|
&(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), destRect);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
CopyBits(&(theBlock->maskMap), theBlock->dstMap, &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), destRect, srcBic, NULL);
|
||
|
CopyBits((BitMapPtr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), theBlock->dstMap, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), destRect, srcOr, NULL);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotDeep, PlotShallowBlackAndWhite and PlotShallowColor are all called by PlotTheIcon, once it has been decided what kind of data
|
||
|
// we will be plotting. When these routines are called, theBlock has theDevice, theClut and theData set up. The clipRgn has also been
|
||
|
// set up to whatever extent is necessary.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotDeep is used to plot color data to a deep color screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotDeep(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle theData = theBlock->theData;
|
||
|
short theTransform = theBlock->theTransform;
|
||
|
char dataState;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the CLUT is purgeable and rendering may move memory.
|
||
|
|
||
|
HNoPurge((Handle)(theBlock->theClut));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we've gotten as far as calling PlotDeep we know that there's a good, disabled clut for this screen.
|
||
|
// Setting the local copy theTransform to none indicates that we should not attempt a bit cleared disabled
|
||
|
// transform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
theTransform = ttNone;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if our data is unloaded, we attempt to load it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(*theData))
|
||
|
LoadResource(theData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// lock down the image data because CopyBits or CopyMask may move memory (if only rarely)
|
||
|
|
||
|
dataState = HGetState(theData);
|
||
|
HLock(theData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetUpPixMap(theBlock); // initialize dataMap with additional fields needed for a PixMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Save the color environment
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Ensure black and white for fore and backGround color
|
||
|
|
||
|
ForeColor(blackColor);
|
||
|
BackColor(whiteColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theTransform is ttOpen, the transform code will do all the work. Otherwise, we render
|
||
|
// the main color image.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform != ttOpen)
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there's a transform, we OR or bit clear over the image in an appropriate way.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theBlock->useRegions)
|
||
|
DoRegionTransform(theBlock, theTransform);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DoBitMapTransform(theBlock, theTransform, false);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// restore the color environment
|
||
|
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
HPurge((Handle)(theBlock->dataMap.pmTable));
|
||
|
HSetState(theData, dataState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotShallowBlackAndWhite is used to plot to a one-bit screen (Either a black and white Mac or
|
||
|
// a monitor set to one-bit)
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotShallowBlackAndWhite(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short theTransform = theBlock->theTransform;
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.baseAddr = *(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the icon is selected, we invert the current fore and backGround color
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RGBColor RGBFore,
|
||
|
RGBBack;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
GetForeColor(&RGBFore);
|
||
|
GetBackColor(&RGBBack);
|
||
|
|
||
|
RGBForeColor(&RGBBack);
|
||
|
RGBBackColor(&RGBFore);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GrafPtr curPort = myGetPort();
|
||
|
*((long *)(&foreGround)) = curPort->fgColor;
|
||
|
*((long *)(&backGround)) = curPort->bkColor;
|
||
|
ForeColor(*((long *)(&backGround)));
|
||
|
BackColor(*((long *)(&foreGround)));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we have a transform, use the transform code to render the icon and the transform. Otherwise,
|
||
|
// just render the data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// If we have to use regions to generate the transformed image, render the icon and modify it
|
||
|
// by the transform. Otherwise, do the operation in one pass with DoBitMapTransform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->useRegions)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theTransform != ttOpen)
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
DoRegionTransform(theBlock, theTransform);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DoBitMapTransform(theBlock, theTransform, true);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we mucked with the color environment, restore it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ForeColor(*((long *)(&foreGround)));
|
||
|
BackColor(*((long *)(&backGround)));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotShallowColor is for plotting one-bit data to a deep screen
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotShallowColor(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RGBColor foreColor,
|
||
|
backColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
short screenDepth = theBlock->screenDepth,
|
||
|
theTransform = theBlock->theTransform,
|
||
|
theLabel;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Boolean isDeep = (screenDepth > 4); // Are we deeper than 4-bits?
|
||
|
|
||
|
// this check makes sure that labeling does not happen in gray-scale or in 2-bit mode
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((screenDepth <= 2) || (theBlock->theDevice && !((*(theBlock->theDevice))->gdFlags & 0x1)))
|
||
|
theLabel = 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
theLabel = theBlock->theLabel;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theLabel)
|
||
|
(void)GetLabel(theLabel, &foreColor, NULL);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
GetForeColor(&foreColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform == ttOpen)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
backColor.red = 52266; // It seems strange to hard-code this color.
|
||
|
backColor.green = 52266; // Should it maybe be function of the label
|
||
|
backColor.blue = 65322; // or some other factor? HMMMM?
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
GetBackColor(&backColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.baseAddr = *(theBlock->theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This check allows for a pure disabled color to be used on a screen that has one.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, a disabled icon will be Bit-Cleared with a 50% pattern. GetGray has
|
||
|
// the side-effect of setting foreColor to the average of backColor and foreColor.
|
||
|
// It returns false if no good average could be found. The condition should read
|
||
|
// something like "If we're on a an 8-bit monitor or we're on a 4-bit monitor and
|
||
|
// there's no label, try to find a disabled color for this icon. If you can find
|
||
|
// one, use that color as the foreground color and treat the icon as not transformed."
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((theTransform == ttDisabled) && (isDeep || (!theLabel)) &&
|
||
|
GetGray(theBlock->theDevice, &backColor, &foreColor))
|
||
|
theTransform = ttNone;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the icon is selected, set up the color environment to make it appear darkened.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
void Darken(RGBColor *aColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// on a four-bit screen, there is almost never an appropriate, darkened color available,
|
||
|
// so we don't try.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (isDeep)
|
||
|
Darken(&foreColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
Darken(&backColor);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Note: There is no guarantee that a good approximation of foreColor and backColor exist
|
||
|
// on the destination device. This is a hole in the whole color protection scheme in this code.
|
||
|
// These colors should probably be validated in some way before they are used, falling back on a
|
||
|
// black & white image.
|
||
|
|
||
|
RGBForeColor(&foreColor);
|
||
|
RGBBackColor(&backColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Use the same criterion as in PlotShallowBlackAndWhite for render the image.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theTransform)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theBlock->useRegions)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theTransform != ttOpen)
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
DoRegionTransform(theBlock, theTransform);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DoBitMapTransform(theBlock, theTransform, true);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
Render(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This routine simply decides which of the two PlotShallow flavors to use. It exists for
|
||
|
// historical reasons and should be folded into PlotTheIcon in a future version.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotShallow(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.rowBytes = theBlock->rowBytes;
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.pixelSize = 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->screenDepth >= 2)
|
||
|
PlotShallowColor(theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotShallowBlackAndWhite(theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotTheIcon sets up the ParamBlock for plotting the icon to the particular screen and sets up
|
||
|
// the clip region as appropriate. It is either called directly by PlotIconGeneric or indirectly
|
||
|
// by way of DeviceLoop. On entry, theBlock has been set up by SetupParamBlock, MakeBoundary has
|
||
|
// been called, alignment has been done and the mask has been prescaled if necessary. PlotTheIcon
|
||
|
// gets the best available data for the screen depth and calls one of the plotting routines above
|
||
|
// to render the data with its transform.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotTheIcon(short screenDepth,
|
||
|
short flags,
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice,
|
||
|
ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Rect boundRect,
|
||
|
sectRect;
|
||
|
|
||
|
RgnHandle saveClip = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
short theTransform = theBlock->theTransform;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// flags will be non-zero if PlotTheIcon was called from DeviceLoop. Flags will be zero if it
|
||
|
// was called directly from PlotIconGeneric which implies a single target device.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theDevice && flags)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// the following code generates a global rectangle which bounds the icon in its destination
|
||
|
// size.
|
||
|
|
||
|
boundRect = theBlock->boundary;
|
||
|
MapRect(&boundRect, &(theBlock->dataMap.bounds), &(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
LocalToGlobal((Point *)&boundRect);
|
||
|
LocalToGlobal((Point *)(&(boundRect.bottom)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If this global rectangle dosen't intersect the GDevice were checking, then we won't plot to it.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, we will check if it is only partially on the screen. If it is, we will adjust the
|
||
|
// clipRgn so that only the portion of the icon that appears on the screen will be drawn.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (SectRect(&((*theDevice)->gdRect), &boundRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if ((!EqualRect(§Rect, &boundRect)) && (!theBlock->dontDraw))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
RgnHandle realClip = myGetPort()->clipRgn;
|
||
|
|
||
|
saveClip = NewRgn();
|
||
|
GetClip(saveClip);
|
||
|
GlobalToLocal((Point *)(§Rect));
|
||
|
GlobalToLocal((Point *)(&(sectRect.bottom)));
|
||
|
ClipRect(§Rect);
|
||
|
SectRgn(saveClip, realClip, realClip);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->screenDepth = screenDepth;
|
||
|
theBlock->theDevice = theDevice;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following conditional reads - "try to plot the icon as color if A) we are plotting to an 8-bit
|
||
|
// screen and the transform is not ttOpen or B) we are plotting to a 4-bit screen, the icon is not
|
||
|
// selected, and the transform is neither ttOpen nor ttDisabled. Otherwise, treat it as one-bit"
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((screenDepth > 4) && (theTransform != ttOpen)) ||
|
||
|
((screenDepth == 4) && (!(theBlock->selected)) && (!(theTransform & ttDisabled))))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = screenDepth; // Initialize data depth to screen depth. GetBestData may
|
||
|
GetBestData(theBlock); // change this value.
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = 1;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotTheIcon is being called from LoadIconCache, we're done loading the data and we run away.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->dontDraw)
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->dataDepth >= 4)
|
||
|
PlotDeep(theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotShallow(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (saveClip)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
SetClip(saveClip);
|
||
|
DisposeRgn(saveClip);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// MakeBoundary creates a rectangle within the bounds of the maskMap (before it is pre-scaled) which
|
||
|
// bounds the non-zero bits of the mask. It returns false if the mask is all zeros.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Boolean MakeBoundary(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char *ptr = (unsigned char *)(theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr); // <57>
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned short mark,
|
||
|
side,
|
||
|
rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes,
|
||
|
height = theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom;
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long temp,
|
||
|
checkSum,
|
||
|
sizeMask = (theBlock->rowBytes < 4) ? 0xFFFF0000 : 0xFFFFFFFF;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find the first row that has data and call it the top.
|
||
|
for (side = 0; side < height; ++side, ptr += rowBytes)
|
||
|
if (*((unsigned long *)ptr) & sizeMask)
|
||
|
break;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If no data in the mask return false
|
||
|
if (side == height)
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.top = side;
|
||
|
|
||
|
checkSum = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// mark is set equal to the row number of the last row with data. checkSum
|
||
|
// is set to the OR of all the rows.
|
||
|
for (; side < height; ++side, ptr += rowBytes)
|
||
|
if (temp = (*((unsigned long *)ptr) & sizeMask))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
mark = side;
|
||
|
checkSum |= temp;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the bottom is equal to the row number of the last row with data plus one.
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.bottom = mark + 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// checkSum is shifted left until the most significant bit is one.
|
||
|
for (side = 0; !(checkSum & 0x80000000); checkSum <<= 1, ++side);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the number of shifts will be the left boundary
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.left = side;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// checkSum is further shifted left until all the data is gone.
|
||
|
for (; checkSum; checkSum <<= 1, ++side);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the number of shifts plus the left offset equals the right boundary.
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary.right = side;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CreateMask generates a mask from some data. It is generated into a buffer
|
||
|
// at the end of theBlock. CalcMask is used to generate the data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void CreateMask(ParamBlock *theBlock, long maskByteLength)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Ptr maskBuffer = (Ptr)(theBlock->maskBuffer);
|
||
|
short rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes,
|
||
|
height = ShortDiv(maskByteLength, rowBytes);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This catches the odd case in which an icon is larger than an icon
|
||
|
// but smaller than an icon with a mask. This makes sure we only use
|
||
|
// 32 bits of height so as not to overrun our buffer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (height > 32)
|
||
|
height = 32;
|
||
|
|
||
|
CalcMask((Ptr)(*(theBlock->theMask)),
|
||
|
maskBuffer, rowBytes, 4,
|
||
|
height, rowBytes >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = maskBuffer;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// SetupParamBlock finds the appropriate size category of icon to be dealing
|
||
|
// with, gets (or synthesizes) the mask for the data, locks all necessary data
|
||
|
// down, sets up the maskMap and some parameters that don't change throughout
|
||
|
// the course of the plot (or make region) call. It returns FALSE if no mask
|
||
|
// (1-bit data) could be found in any size category.
|
||
|
|
||
|
short SetupParamBlock(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short size,
|
||
|
rowBytes,
|
||
|
desired = ChooseBestSize(&(theBlock->theRect));
|
||
|
|
||
|
long maskByteLength;
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle theMask;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find a mask of the right size category
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (size = desired; size <= miniIcon1; size += IconDepthSpace)
|
||
|
if (theMask = (*(theBlock->userProc))(theBlock->userData, size))
|
||
|
goto done;
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (size = desired - IconDepthSpace; size >= largeIcon1; size -= IconDepthSpace)
|
||
|
if (theMask = (*(theBlock->userProc))(theBlock->userData, size))
|
||
|
goto done;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
done:
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theMask = theMask;
|
||
|
theBlock->theGroup = size;
|
||
|
theBlock->theData = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// size here means the basic dimension (height) of the icon of specific size
|
||
|
// category. rowBytes here is a basic rowBytes of the one bit data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (size == largeIcon1)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
size = 32;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rowBytes = 2;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (size == smallIcon1)
|
||
|
size = 16;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
size = 12;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the basic rowBytes is stored because maskMap.rowBytes might be changed to 4
|
||
|
// arbitrarily if the mask is synthesized.
|
||
|
theBlock->rowBytes = rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// maskMap is setup
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes = rowBytes;
|
||
|
MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds) = 0L;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom = size;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.bounds.right = rowBytes << 3; // this insures that a mini icon is 12X16
|
||
|
|
||
|
// lock down the mask member and remember its state.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!(*theMask))
|
||
|
LoadResource(theMask); // theoretically its cool to let LoadResource decide whether the resource is loaded or not
|
||
|
// but LoadResource has been back-patched thrice at the time of this writing and all kinds
|
||
|
// of annoying stuff goes before the simple check of the master pointer. sigh.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The following does a size check to guess whether an icon has a mask or not. If not,
|
||
|
// a probable mask is synthesized.
|
||
|
|
||
|
rowBytes *= size; // I'm hijacking rowbytes to use as a temp
|
||
|
rowBytes <<= 1;
|
||
|
maskByteLength = myGetHandleSize(theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is no mask data appended to the one-bit version of this icon (i.e. its not a proper ICN#, ics#, icm#)
|
||
|
// synthesize a mask. Otherwise, we just point the maskMap baseAddr at the mask data in the one-bit icon.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (maskByteLength < rowBytes)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
rowBytes >>= 1;
|
||
|
CreateMask(theBlock, maskByteLength);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (*theMask) + (maskByteLength >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is just to allow the Finder to use some SICN's as minis without special-casing (Grrrr!)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((theBlock->theGroup == miniIcon1) && (maskByteLength > rowBytes))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long center = ((theBlock->theRect.bottom + theBlock->theRect.top) >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theRect.top = center - 8;
|
||
|
theBlock->theRect.bottom = center + 8;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom = 16;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.bounds = theBlock->maskMap.bounds; // the mask and data have the same source bounds (may change later)
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.pixelSize = 0; // functions as flag saying "the data map is not yet initialized as a color grafport"
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->useRegions = false; // Initially assume that we will not use regions for transforms and hit testing.
|
||
|
// PrescaleMask may change this value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PrescaleMask is used after SetupParamBlock. If the destination rectangle of an icon is
|
||
|
// less than or equal to 32 in both dimensions, and if it is different in height or width
|
||
|
// to maskMap.bounds, we do the stretching that will take place off-screen. The result ends
|
||
|
// up in the maskBuffer and maskMap is modified to point to it. After calling PrescaleMask,
|
||
|
// you are guaranteed that the maskMap describes the countours of the icon's mask as it will
|
||
|
// be drawn (which is important for doing transforms and for hit-testing without doing region
|
||
|
// operations). If an icon is larger than our off-screen buffer (never under 7.0), we use
|
||
|
// region operations for hit-testing and transforms. PrescaleMask is called by HitTestIconGeneric
|
||
|
// and by PlotIconGeneric (only if there is a transform).
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PrescaleMask(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short width = theBlock->theRect.right - theBlock->theRect.left,
|
||
|
height = theBlock->theRect.bottom - theBlock->theRect.top;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((width > 32) || (height > 32))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->useRegions = true;
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This checks if any stretching will be done… we know that maskMap.bounds has (0,0) for its
|
||
|
// upper left coordinate.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((width != theBlock->maskMap.bounds.right) || (height != theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long tempBuffer[32];
|
||
|
BitMap tempMap;
|
||
|
Rect newBounds;
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeLong(newBounds) = 0;
|
||
|
newBounds.right = width;
|
||
|
newBounds.bottom = height;
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeLong(tempMap.bounds) = 0;
|
||
|
MakeLong(tempMap.bounds.bottom) = 0x00200020;
|
||
|
tempMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
tempMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)theBlock->maskBuffer;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if maskBuffer is currently being used, as in the case of a missing mask we have synthesized,
|
||
|
// we dump it temporarily to an intermediate buffer.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr == theBlock->maskBuffer)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)tempBuffer;
|
||
|
BlockMove(theBlock->maskBuffer, tempBuffer, 32 * sizeof(unsigned long));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
CopyBits(&(theBlock->maskMap), &tempMap, &(theBlock->maskMap.bounds), &newBounds, srcCopy, NULL);
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeLong(theBlock->maskMap.bounds.bottom) = MakeLong(newBounds.bottom);
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)theBlock->maskBuffer;
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes = 4;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the routine that all plotting goes through. By the time we get to PlotIconGeneric, we
|
||
|
// have a handler routine and some data pushed that identifies how we are going to get suite
|
||
|
// members. For example, in the case of PlotIconID, the refCon is equal to the resource ID and
|
||
|
// the IconRetriever is set to a function call FromResource which calls GetResource for an icon
|
||
|
// type and the given ID. The dontDraw parameter allows for LoadIconCache to act as if it were
|
||
|
// drawing, but in stead just load the data.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// PlotIconGeneric is called from assembly language wrappers in IconUtils.a that Implement
|
||
|
// PlotIconID, PlotIconSuite, PlotIconMethod and LoadIconCache.
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define PrintVars (*((short *)0x948))
|
||
|
pascal OSErr PlotIconGeneric(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc,
|
||
|
short dontDraw)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GrafPort *curPort;
|
||
|
ParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if this is a call to LoadIconCache and the input is not an iconcache,
|
||
|
// exit with a paramErr
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (dontDraw && !((*((IconSuiteHandle)refCon))->type))
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// save some basic information in the parameter block
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = refCon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = iconProc;
|
||
|
theBlock.theTransform = transform & transformMask;
|
||
|
theBlock.selected = transform & ttSelected;
|
||
|
theBlock.dontDraw = dontDraw;
|
||
|
|
||
|
curPort = myGetPort();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// onScreen is true if a print page is not open and no picture is open
|
||
|
theBlock.onScreen = ((PrintVars == -1) && (!(curPort->picSave)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.dstMap = &(curPort->portBits);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SetupParamBlock(&theBlock))
|
||
|
return noMaskFoundErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// See MakeBoundary above. If no data was found in the mask portion of the
|
||
|
// one-bit data, then clearly CopyMask would not plot anything. So why bother
|
||
|
// doing any more work? This is not the same case as no one-bit data available.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!MakeBoundary(&theBlock))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// boundary-making and alignment have to take place before PrescaleMask, because they
|
||
|
// make certain assumptions about the mask which in general are no longer valid after the
|
||
|
// pre-scale.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// this line performs an off-screen stretching of the mask data if there is a
|
||
|
// a difference between the size of the destination rect and the mask size. Thus,
|
||
|
// the maskMap field will always have a correctly scaled mask of the data which
|
||
|
// can be used for creating transform effects etc. The one exception would be if the
|
||
|
// destination rect was so large that the pre-scaled mask would not fit in the 32 X 32
|
||
|
// buffer in the parameter block. In this case, the useRegions flag would be set and
|
||
|
// regions would be used for transforms, hit-testing etc.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock.theTransform)
|
||
|
PrescaleMask(&theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we are plotting to a PixMap, we lock down the mask (because color CopyBits/CopyMask
|
||
|
// can move memory), get label information and decide how to plot based on our screen setup.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (curPort->portBits.rowBytes < 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Handle theMask = theBlock.theMask;
|
||
|
char maskState = HGetState(theMask);
|
||
|
HLock(theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theLabel = (transform & labelMask) >> labelShift;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we are plotting to actual video devices, then we need to see if we've got a
|
||
|
// device set by SetIconDevice or if our system has only one screen. If so, we call
|
||
|
// PlotTheIcon once with the appropriate device. If not, we have multiple monitors and
|
||
|
// we need to use DeviceLoop to call PlotTheIcon in the appropriate way. If we're not
|
||
|
// plotting to a video device, but rather to an offscreen thing or a printer, we call PlotTheIcon
|
||
|
// once with a device of NULL, meaning that we're plotting off-screen.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock.onScreen)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
GDHandle theScreen;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theGlobals->deviceListSize == 1)
|
||
|
theScreen = theGlobals->deviceCheckList[0].theDevice;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
theScreen = theGlobals->virtualScreen;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theScreen)
|
||
|
PlotTheIcon((*((*theScreen)->gdPMap))->pixelSize, 0, theScreen, &theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DeviceLoop(NULL, (DeviceLoopDrawingProcPtr)PlotTheIcon, (long)(&theBlock),
|
||
|
dontMatchSeeds | singleDevices | allDevices);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotTheIcon(8, 0, NULL, &theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
HSetState(theMask, maskState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock.theLabel = 0; // If we're not plotting to a CGrafPort, we don't use a label.
|
||
|
PlotTheIcon(1, 0, NULL, &theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
out:
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// IconToRgnGeneric is called by a bunch of assembly language wrappers in IconUtils.a to implement
|
||
|
// IconIDToRgn, IconSuiteToRgn and IconMethodToRgn. It is also called from HitTestIconGeneric if regions
|
||
|
// will be used to perform hit-testing. It takes a valid region, the rect to which the theoretical icon was drawn, the
|
||
|
// alignment used and the same kind of call-back used by PlotIconGeneric above. theRgn is changed to be
|
||
|
// equivalent to the icon's mask when aligned and stretched to the destination rect.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr IconToRgnGeneric(RgnHandle theRgn,
|
||
|
Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
IconAlignmentType align,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// minimal set up for call to SetupParamBlock (I know, its a little squirly that SetupParamBlock needs set up but…)
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = refCon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = iconProc;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we set up the ParamBlock, which finds the right-sized mask for the destination rect and loads it. It also
|
||
|
// may synthesize a mask if a SICN or ICON is used for a one-bit icon.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SetupParamBlock(&theBlock))
|
||
|
return noMaskFoundErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is no data in the mask, we make an empty region. Makes sense.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (MakeBoundary(&theBlock))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// MaskRgn moves memory so we lock down our mask. Note for future change: a check should be made here
|
||
|
// to see if the mask is in maskBuffer, in which case this lock and restore is extraneous.
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle theMask = theBlock.theMask;
|
||
|
char maskState = HGetState(theMask);
|
||
|
HLock(theMask);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there's an alignment specified, we do it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// make the region and stretch it appropriately
|
||
|
|
||
|
MaskRgn(theRgn, &theBlock);
|
||
|
AdjustRgn(theRgn, &(theBlock.maskMap.bounds), &(theBlock.theRect));
|
||
|
|
||
|
HSetState(theMask, maskState);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
SetEmptyRgn(theRgn);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// HitTestIconMaskGeneric is called from HitTestIconGeneric (See Below) if regions are not used for the
|
||
|
// hit-testing. It takes the same input as HitTestIconGeneric. The test is performed by stretching the
|
||
|
// mask data off-screen (if necessary) and comparing the point or rect to this data arithmeticly.
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define isAPoint 0
|
||
|
#define isARect 1
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal Boolean HitTestIconMaskGeneric(unsigned long pointOrRect,
|
||
|
short IsRect,
|
||
|
Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
IconAlignmentType align,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
Rect sectRect;
|
||
|
unsigned long testMap;
|
||
|
short theRow,
|
||
|
theCount;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Set up for call to SetupParamBlock (yeah yeah, I know)
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = refCon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = iconProc;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there is no one-bit data or the mask contains nothing but zeros, we return false
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SetupParamBlock(&theBlock) || !MakeBoundary(&theBlock))
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there is alignment, we do it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
theRect = &(theBlock.theRect); // we hijak the parameter theRect to point to the possibly shifted destination rectangle
|
||
|
// (NOTE: This is very silly. The idea was to make references to theRect smaller and faster.
|
||
|
// Why not make a new variable, or not do this at all and refer to the rect as theBlock.theRect??
|
||
|
// We luck out under the 3.2 compiler, which sees that we refer to theRect a lot and allocates A3
|
||
|
// for this. If we were out of address registers, this would make larger and slower code)
|
||
|
|
||
|
PrescaleMask(&theBlock); // if the icon is to be shrunken, this routine will do the shrinking offscreen and place the
|
||
|
// result in maskMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we set up theRow, theCount and testMap to test against the pre-scaled mask data. theRow is equal to the first row of the maskMap
|
||
|
// that we will test. theCount is equal to the number of rows we will test. testMap is a long-word bitMap which we will intersect
|
||
|
// with each row that we test. If any row has intersection with testMap, then we have a hit.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// we do the intersection with the possibly shifted rectangle to see if alignment has moved us
|
||
|
// out of the test rect. (if there is no alignment, this is redundant with the SectRect we did
|
||
|
// in HitTestIconGeneric below. This probably needs restructuring in a new version.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SectRect((Rect *)pointOrRect, theRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// we set test map equal to one scan-line of the rectangle intersection of the test rect and the destination
|
||
|
|
||
|
testMap = 0xffffffff;
|
||
|
testMap <<= (32 - (sectRect.right - sectRect.left));
|
||
|
testMap >>= (sectRect.left - theRect->left);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theRow is the top of the intersection rectangle in destination co-ordinates.
|
||
|
|
||
|
theRow = (sectRect.top - theRect->top);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theCount is equal to the height of the intersection
|
||
|
|
||
|
theCount = (sectRect.bottom - sectRect.top);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// testMap is set to a one bit at the horizontal location of the test point in destination co-ordinates
|
||
|
|
||
|
testMap = 1 << (31 - ((short)(pointOrRect & 0xffff) - theRect->left));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theRow is set equal to the vertical location of the test point in destination co-ordinates
|
||
|
|
||
|
theRow = ((short)(pointOrRect >> 16)) - theRect->top;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// there is only one row to test
|
||
|
|
||
|
theCount = 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Here we take theRow, theCount and testMap and compare it to the mask data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short rowBytes = theBlock.maskMap.rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// since we treat rows that are sometimes only a word in width as long words, we need
|
||
|
// to mask off the right most data that is significant.
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long significantMask = -1L << (32 - theBlock.maskMap.bounds.right);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned char *maskData = theBlock.maskMap.baseAddr + ShortMul(rowBytes, theRow),
|
||
|
*endData = maskData + ShortMul(rowBytes, theCount);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// start at theRow and loop through theCount rows, testing for itersection with testMap
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if (*((unsigned long *)maskData) & significantMask & testMap)
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
|
||
|
maskData += rowBytes;
|
||
|
} while (maskData < endData);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// HitTestIconGeneric is called by assembly language wrappers in IconUtils.a to implement PtInIconID,
|
||
|
// PtInIconSuite, PtInIconMethod, RectInIconID, RectInIconSuite and RectInIconMethod. It takes a value
|
||
|
// which is either a point or pointer to a rect along with a flag indicating which one it is. It also
|
||
|
// takes a rect which is where the icon being hit-test was drawn and the alignment that was used. Finally,
|
||
|
// the generic call-back and refcon used in all the generic routines (PlotIconGeneric, IconToRgnGeneric, etc.)
|
||
|
// It returns true if the mask data as aligned and stretched intersects either the rect or the pixel to
|
||
|
// the lower right of the point. It returns false if there is no intersection or if any kind of error was
|
||
|
// encountered.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal Boolean HitTestIconGeneric(unsigned long pointOrRect,
|
||
|
Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
IconAlignmentType align,
|
||
|
long refCon,
|
||
|
IconRetriever iconProc,
|
||
|
short IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Boolean rval = false;
|
||
|
RgnHandle testRgn = NULL;
|
||
|
Rect sectRect;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if the test rectangle does not even touch the destination rect, clearly there is no hit
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!SectRect((Rect *)pointOrRect, theRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the test rectangle completely engulfs the destination rectangle, clearly there is a
|
||
|
// hit and no further testing is required.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (EqualRect(theRect, §Rect))
|
||
|
goto trueOut;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
if (!PtInRect(*((Point *)(&pointOrRect)), theRect)) // If our point is not in the ball-bark, we bail
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The only time we would use IconToRgnGeneric to test pointOrRect would be if our maskMap needed scaling
|
||
|
// and we could not do the scaling off-screen with PrescaleMask. This is only true if the height or
|
||
|
// width of the destination rect is greater than 32 (the size of our off-screen buffer). Otherwise, we
|
||
|
// use HitTestIconmaskGeneric which is faster and dosen't move memory as much.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((theRect->right - theRect->left) > 32) || ((theRect->bottom - theRect->top) > 32))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
testRgn = NewRgn();
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IconToRgnGeneric(testRgn, theRect, align, refCon, iconProc))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (IsRect)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!RectInRgn((Rect *)pointOrRect, testRgn))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
if (!PtInRgn(*((Point *)(&pointOrRect)), testRgn))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else if (!HitTestIconMaskGeneric(pointOrRect, IsRect, theRect, align, refCon, iconProc))
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
trueOut:
|
||
|
|
||
|
rval = true;
|
||
|
|
||
|
out:
|
||
|
if (testRgn)
|
||
|
DisposeRgn(testRgn);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// MakeIconData is called after DeviceList is initialized to set up the ExpandMem global structure used by the icon utilities.
|
||
|
// The structure is returned in the variable parameter iconCluts. (Named for historical reasons and not changed lately)
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// This is the layout of the structure:
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// #define Labels 8
|
||
|
// #define Sets 8
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// typedef struct
|
||
|
// {
|
||
|
// Strings labelStrings; // array of eight string handles to label strings. On a black and
|
||
|
// // white Mac, the rest of the structure after this point is not allocated.
|
||
|
// long seeds[Labels * Sets]; // array of seeds for all the cluts (transformed and labeled)
|
||
|
// CTabHandle colorTables[Labels * Sets], // array of CTabHandles for all cluts
|
||
|
// originals[2]; // handles to the two original rom cluts (clut 4 and clut 8)
|
||
|
// RGBColor labelColors[Labels]; // array of 8 label colors
|
||
|
// unsigned char **indexLists[2]; // two handles to arrays of indices used in checking colors
|
||
|
// GDHandle virtualScreen; // a GDHandle used by SetIconDevice and GetIconDevice
|
||
|
// long deviceListSize; // number of GDevices at boot time
|
||
|
// DeviceCheck deviceCheckList[0]; // a variable number of DeviceCheck structures used to cache
|
||
|
// // the results of CheckColors for all GDevices
|
||
|
// } GlobalIconData;
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// typedef Handle Strings[Labels];
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// typedef struct
|
||
|
// {
|
||
|
// GDHandle theDevice; // Handle to the GDevice that we're caching the information about
|
||
|
// long theSeed; // the seed of its GDPmap's pmTable at last caching
|
||
|
// unsigned long checkMask, // a bit-map specifying which cluts we actually tried and cached results for
|
||
|
// checkResults, // results of caching as a bit-map
|
||
|
// disabledCheckMask, // the other long word of the CheckMask bit-map needed when we added disabled cluts
|
||
|
// disabledCheckResults; // the other long word of the CheckResults bit-map needed when we added disabled cluts
|
||
|
// } DeviceCheck;
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void MakeIconData(GlobalIconDataHandle *iconCluts)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long size,
|
||
|
devices;
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataHandle temp;
|
||
|
short curResFile, i;
|
||
|
Handle aHandle,
|
||
|
*strPtr;
|
||
|
RGBColor *colorPtr;
|
||
|
GDHandle aGDHandle;
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *checkPtr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're running on a color machine, allocate the whole structure. Otherwise, just allocate the
|
||
|
// label string list.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
aGDHandle = DeviceList;
|
||
|
size = sizeof(GlobalIconData);
|
||
|
|
||
|
devices = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
++devices;
|
||
|
size += sizeof(DeviceCheck);
|
||
|
aGDHandle = (GDHandle)((*aGDHandle)->gdNextGD);
|
||
|
} while (aGDHandle);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
size = sizeof(Strings);
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp = (GlobalIconDataHandle)NewHandleSysClear(size);
|
||
|
HLock((Handle)temp); // temporarily lock the structure
|
||
|
|
||
|
*iconCluts = temp; // return the structure in the variable parameter
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = &((*temp)->labelStrings); // point to the beginning of the label string handles
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the label strings (Should they be unloaded?)
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = labelColorBase; i < (labelColorBase + Labels); ++i)
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('lstr', i);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're not on a color machine, we're done.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!HaveCQD())
|
||
|
goto out;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// virtualScreen is initially NULL, indicating that we will traverse the list of devices normally.
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*temp)->virtualScreen = NULL;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// set deviceListSize with the count we generated for allocation
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*temp)->deviceListSize = devices;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Run through the list of devices, initializing our cache of device information.
|
||
|
|
||
|
aGDHandle = DeviceList;
|
||
|
checkPtr = &((*temp)->deviceCheckList[0]);
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
checkPtr->theDevice = aGDHandle;
|
||
|
checkPtr->theSeed = (*((*((*aGDHandle)->gdPMap))->pmTable))->ctSeed;
|
||
|
checkPtr->checkMask = 0L;
|
||
|
checkPtr->disabledCheckMask = 0L;
|
||
|
++checkPtr;
|
||
|
aGDHandle = (GDHandle)((*aGDHandle)->gdNextGD);
|
||
|
} while (aGDHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Save the current resource file and set to the System file.
|
||
|
|
||
|
curResFile = CurResFile();
|
||
|
UseResFile(0);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the two lists of color indices to check at CheckColors time
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&((*temp)->indexLists));
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('indl', labelColorBase);
|
||
|
*strPtr = GetResource('indl', labelColorBase + 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the two standard system clut's for 8 and 4 bits from ROM
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&((*temp)->originals));
|
||
|
*((short *)RomMapInsert) = mapTrue;
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('clut',8);
|
||
|
*((short *)RomMapInsert) = mapTrue;
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = GetResource('clut',4);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Set the first label color to black.
|
||
|
|
||
|
colorPtr = &((*temp)->labelColors);
|
||
|
*((long *)(colorPtr)) = 0L;
|
||
|
colorPtr->blue = 0;
|
||
|
++colorPtr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the other seven label colors from resources
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = (labelColorBase + 1); i < (labelColorBase + Labels); ++i)
|
||
|
*colorPtr++ = **((RGBColor **)GetResource('rgb ', i));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Restore the resource file
|
||
|
|
||
|
UseResFile(curResFile);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the seed for the 8-bit system clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&((*temp)->seeds));
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)((*((*temp)->originals[0]))->ctSeed);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Generate seeds for the other 7 labeled 8-bit cluts and the
|
||
|
// selected clut and the 7 labeled selected 8-bit cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 1; i < (Labels * 2); ++i)
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)GetCTSeed();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the see for the 4-bit system clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)((*((*temp)->originals[1]))->ctSeed);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Generate seeds for the other 7 labeled 4-bit cluts and the
|
||
|
// selected 4-bit clut and the 7 labeled selected 4-bit cluts and
|
||
|
// all the other combinations of labeled, selected and disabled cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 1; i < (Labels * 6); ++i)
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = (Handle)GetCTSeed();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Allocate empty handles for all the cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
strPtr = (Handle *)(&((*temp)->colorTables));
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (i = 0; i < (Labels * Sets); ++i)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
aHandle = NewEmptyHandleSys();
|
||
|
*strPtr++ = aHandle;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
out:
|
||
|
HUnlock((Handle)temp);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define acceptableDelta (2 * 256)
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CompareComponent takes two color components and returns 0 if the two are equal within
|
||
|
// the tolerance specified by acceptableDelta, a negative number if the first is less than
|
||
|
// the second by acceptableDelta and a positive number if the first is greater than the
|
||
|
// second by acceptableDelta.
|
||
|
|
||
|
long CompareComponent(unsigned short comp1, unsigned short comp2)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long absoluteDifference = (unsigned long)comp1 - (unsigned long)comp2;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((absoluteDifference < acceptableDelta) && (absoluteDifference > -acceptableDelta))
|
||
|
return 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return absoluteDifference;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Darken is used to reduce the brightness of an RGBColor to create selected clut's. The intention
|
||
|
// is to take a color, halve all the components and then increase the saturation of the result by
|
||
|
// halving again all but the strongest component. It is necessary to increase the saturation of
|
||
|
// a color when you halve its components because dividing all the components by two causes
|
||
|
// the difference in component values to become much smaller, decreasing the saturation. The alogrithm
|
||
|
// implemented below causes the HSV value of the color to be halved, while approximately maintaining
|
||
|
// the color's original saturation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void Darken(RGBColor *aColor)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned short *smallest = &(aColor->red),
|
||
|
*notSmallest1 = &(aColor->green),
|
||
|
*notSmallest2 = &(aColor->blue),
|
||
|
*temp = smallest;
|
||
|
|
||
|
long compareValue;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// halve all values
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor->red >>= 1;
|
||
|
aColor->green >>= 1;
|
||
|
aColor->blue >>= 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Gray has zero saturation, so it can't lose anything in
|
||
|
// the darkening process. Thus we are done in the grayish case.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest1) && !CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest2))
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find the smallest color component.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest1) > 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
temp = smallest;
|
||
|
smallest = notSmallest1;
|
||
|
notSmallest1 = temp;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (CompareComponent(*smallest, *notSmallest2) > 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
temp = smallest;
|
||
|
smallest = notSmallest2;
|
||
|
notSmallest2 = temp;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Divide its value by two again, so that the larger components are emphasized.
|
||
|
|
||
|
(*smallest) >>= 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// take the runner-up in the race for first place and divide it by two again so that
|
||
|
// the largest component is emphasized. If its a tie, we're done.
|
||
|
|
||
|
compareValue = CompareComponent(*notSmallest1, *notSmallest2);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (compareValue < 0)
|
||
|
(*notSmallest1) >>= 1;
|
||
|
else if (compareValue > 0)
|
||
|
(*notSmallest2) >>= 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Luminance takes an RGBColor and generates a value from 0 to 0xffff equal to the percieved
|
||
|
// gray-scale brightness of the color. The algorithm (which is the same one used by the QuickDraw
|
||
|
// to make such conversions) is to take a weighted average of all the components, where the weights
|
||
|
// are 1/8 of the blue component, 5/16 of the red component and 9/16 of the green component. The routine
|
||
|
// is used by Brighten to decide how much to brighten a color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long Luminance(RGBColor *aColor)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned long temp;
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp = ((unsigned long)aColor->red) << 2; // five times the red component
|
||
|
temp += aColor->red;
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp += ((unsigned long)aColor->green) << 3; // plus nine times the green component
|
||
|
temp += aColor->green;
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp += ((unsigned long)aColor->blue) << 1; // plus two times the blue component
|
||
|
|
||
|
return (temp >> 4); // divide the sum by 16 to get the weighted average
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Brighten takes an RGBColor, reduces its saturation and increases its brightness (virtually the inverse
|
||
|
// of Darken). It is used by MakeClut to take a raw label color and convert it into a color which can be
|
||
|
// applied to a clut and used to label 8-bit icons. Brightened colors will not seriously affect the
|
||
|
// brightness of the icon's unselected appearance, but will retain much of the character of the original color.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// A little background: A label color is applied to a clut color by multiplying each component by the
|
||
|
// percentage strength of the corresponding label color component. For example, a label color of
|
||
|
// {0x7fff, 0x3fff, 0xffff} would be interpreted as 50% red, 25% green, 100% blue and each clut color
|
||
|
// would have its components multiplied by the corresponding fraction. Since the standard label colors
|
||
|
// vary greatly in their effect on a clut color and since a label color can be customized by the user to
|
||
|
// any value, a label color must be processed so that it does not reduce the brightness of an affected
|
||
|
// icon to the point where it looks selected or unreadably dark. An ideal label color has low HSV saturation
|
||
|
// so that no color component is so attenuated that it becomes very dark. A pure blue for example is
|
||
|
// 100% saturated and would reduce all components except blue to zero, making for a very dark icon. A low
|
||
|
// saturation color has a lot of gray in it, thus allowing some representation from all colors in the icon.
|
||
|
// A good label color should also have a value (in the HSV sense of the word value) of 100%; that is, it should
|
||
|
// have at least one component that is 100%, so that the overall value of the resultant color is not greatly reduced.
|
||
|
// Finally, whatever process is used to turn a bad label color into a good label color should preserve the HSV hue
|
||
|
// of the color, since that is what gives the color its "character". A further constraint on the algorithm to make
|
||
|
// any label color usable is that it be sensitive to the hue. For example, an unprocessed blue label color of a
|
||
|
// certain saturation and value will make an icon look darker than an unprocessed green label color of the same
|
||
|
// saturation and value, because the human eye is many times more sensitive to green than to blue. Thus a blue
|
||
|
// label color needs to have its saturation reduced more than a green label color.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// The algorithm: The processing of any arbitrary color into a good label color takes place conceptually in three
|
||
|
// steps (although it it implemented in one pass through the components). The first step is to increase the HSV
|
||
|
// value of the color to 100%, while nearly maintaining the hue. This is done by multiplying each component by a
|
||
|
// factor which takes the maximum component to 0xffff, thus "stretching" the color to its maximum value.
|
||
|
// The second step multiplies the color by a fraction related to the original luminance of the label color. This
|
||
|
// makes the color closer to a gray (i.e. lowers its saturation) and incidentally lowers its over all value (brightness).
|
||
|
// The third step compensates for the incidental loss of brightness by adding in a constant value, which is the complement
|
||
|
// of the compression factor. The maximum component in the resulting color is 100%, the saturation has been lowered to
|
||
|
// an extent related to the luminance and the hue is maintained.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void Brighten(RGBColor *labelColor)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned short *component = (unsigned short *)labelColor,
|
||
|
*end = component + 3;
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned long temp,
|
||
|
luminance = Luminance(labelColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned short basis,
|
||
|
max = labelColor->red;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Find the maximum component
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor->green > max)
|
||
|
max = labelColor->green;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor->blue > max)
|
||
|
max = labelColor->blue;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the ultimate brightening. Black gets mapped to white. This implements the "feature"
|
||
|
// that specifying black as a label color means "label this with a text only. Don't apply a color
|
||
|
// to this icon." White will in no way affect the appearance of the icon. This was the lowest impact
|
||
|
// change to implement this feature. A more optimal solution in terms of performance would be to
|
||
|
// bail in PlotIconGeneric when we see a black label color. This implies that we should store the
|
||
|
// label color in the parameter block (since we're going to all the trouble of getting it so early on
|
||
|
// in the plot process). This involves some broad changes in labeling code which did not seem warranted
|
||
|
// at B4 time.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!max)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
*((long *)labelColor) = -1;
|
||
|
labelColor->blue = 0xffff;
|
||
|
|
||
|
return;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// here we calculate the parameters basis and luminance. luminance is related to the gray-scale brightness
|
||
|
// of the color being brightened, but is compressed to range from 0x6000 to 0xffff. Basis is the complement
|
||
|
// of luminance and ranges from 0x9fff to 0. Calculating the values in this way makes the process of
|
||
|
// brightening sensitive to the color being brightened. If the luminance of the color is low, the basis
|
||
|
// will be large and their will be a greater reduction in saturation.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// NOTE: the extent to which luminance is compressed into a smaller range ensures that there is a minimum
|
||
|
// saturation decrease. In the code below, luminance is multiplied by 5/8 and 3/8 of 100% (0x6000) is added
|
||
|
// on to it to achieve the compression. If a fraction smaller the 5/8 is used, the overall saturation of all
|
||
|
// labeled colors will increase. Multiplying luminance by 1/2 and adding 0x8000 produces labeled icons which
|
||
|
// are slightly to dark. Some observers have noted that the current settings produce icons whose labeling
|
||
|
// does not sufficiently suggest the color chosen from the Finder labels menu. This is an area that bears
|
||
|
// some further investigation.
|
||
|
|
||
|
luminance >>= 1; // halve luminance
|
||
|
luminance += (luminance >> 2); // add a quarter of the halved luminance to the halved luminance to get 5/8 luminance
|
||
|
luminance += 0x6000; // add about 3/8 of the whole range to the number
|
||
|
basis = 0xffff - luminance;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This loop uses the calculated parameters luminance and basic to perform the brightening.
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
temp = (unsigned long)(*component);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// stretch the color. If the maximum component is already 100%, skip this step for all components
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (max < 0xffff)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
temp *= 0xffff;
|
||
|
temp /= max; // max will only be zero if the label color is black in which case we will not reach this point
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// compress the color
|
||
|
|
||
|
temp *= luminance;
|
||
|
temp /= 0xffff;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// add in a gray component
|
||
|
|
||
|
*component++ = basis + (unsigned short)temp;
|
||
|
} while (component < end);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// NOTE: for a future version, the following loop body would have been much better. On the other hand, the current
|
||
|
// version makes the underlying model more clear and performance is not particularly critical in this routine.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// temp = (unsigned long)(*component);
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// if (temp < 0xffff)
|
||
|
// {
|
||
|
// temp *= luminance;
|
||
|
// temp /= max;
|
||
|
// *component = basis + (unsigned short)temp;
|
||
|
// }
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// ++component;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// FindBlack is called by MakeClut to find the lowest luminance color in a clut. Why? It's for the 4-bit labeled true CIcon
|
||
|
// (don't laugh). When such an icon is labeled, the rule is that I turn the black color to the label color. In an Icon
|
||
|
// suite, the black color we want is well-defined as the 15 entry. In a CIcon, there may be no real black, so I'll have to
|
||
|
// choose something to label. Might as well be the closest thing to black. NOTE: a next version of this code should check
|
||
|
// the last entry in the clut to see if it is black, and if so it should return clutSize. If the last entry is black, that's
|
||
|
// the one we want. A good way to accomplish this would be to do the search from the last entry backward, bailing if any
|
||
|
// color is black (something this code should do anyway), taking the minimum luminance value otherwise.
|
||
|
|
||
|
long FindBlack(CTabHandle theClut, long clutSize)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec *specList = (*theClut)->ctTable;
|
||
|
unsigned long luminance,
|
||
|
minLuminance = 0xffff;
|
||
|
long rval = 0,
|
||
|
index = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
luminance = Luminance(&(specList->rgb));
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (luminance < minLuminance)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
minLuminance = luminance;
|
||
|
rval = clutSize;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
++index;
|
||
|
++specList;
|
||
|
} while (index <= clutSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return rval;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// MakeClut is called by CheckClut if IconGetClut passes it a purged clut or by GetBestData if IconGetClut returns a purged clut.
|
||
|
// The clut is reallocated, a copy of the ROM clut of the appropriate bit-depth (4 or 8) is copied into it, it is given
|
||
|
// its old seed back and is then processed according to the transform and label. MakeClut is also called by
|
||
|
// SetupParamBlockForCIcon to process a copy of the CIcon's clut to do transforms.
|
||
|
|
||
|
void MakeClut(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
short labelNumber = theBlock->clutNumber; // 0-7, which label, if any, we are using
|
||
|
|
||
|
CTabHandle theClut = theBlock->theClut; // the purged clut handle we are rebuilding
|
||
|
|
||
|
short sourceNumber; // 0 or 1, specifies which of the ROM clut's we will use for a source
|
||
|
|
||
|
unsigned char *listPtr; // pointer to the list of clut indices to be protected with CheckColors
|
||
|
|
||
|
long blackEntry, // index of the color we will consider black for this clut (see FindBlack above)
|
||
|
entryNo,
|
||
|
clutSize; // number of entries in the processed clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
ColorSpec *specList;
|
||
|
|
||
|
RGBColor aColor,
|
||
|
labelColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're recreating a purged IconSuite clut, we will use the clut database in our ExpandMem
|
||
|
// globals for the source. If we are processing a copy of a CIcon clut, we get the clut from
|
||
|
// our parameter block.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theGroup != aCIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
long theSeed = theGlobals->seeds[labelNumber];
|
||
|
CTabHandle source;
|
||
|
unsigned char **theList;
|
||
|
unsigned long size;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// this convoluted arithmetic of getting a labelNumber and sourceNumber from the
|
||
|
// clutNumber (as opposed to just looking at the theLabel field) comes from the fact
|
||
|
// that theLabel specifies what label the user asked for, not necessarily the one
|
||
|
// we're going to give him. For example, if the plotting takes place on a gray screen,
|
||
|
// the label is ignored. The clutNumber reflects this fact, and theLabel does not.
|
||
|
// I could have had more fields in the ParamBlock to figure all this out, but they would
|
||
|
// have to be set up by IconGetClut. In general, it is more important for IconGetClut to be fast,
|
||
|
// since in most cases, the clut will be already created and cached. We now return you
|
||
|
// to your regularly scheduled programming.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the transform is ttDisabled, labelNumber will be in the range of disabled clut numbers.
|
||
|
// This line brings it back into the lower range.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
labelNumber -= ((Labels * Sets) >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the clut is in the 4-bit range, bring it into the lower range and record the fact that
|
||
|
// we will be building a 4-bit clut.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelNumber >= (Labels << 1))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
labelNumber -= (Labels << 1);
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 1;
|
||
|
blackEntry = 15; // Only used if we are processing 4-bit cluts. For non-CIcons blackEntry is always 15
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
labelNumber >>= 1; // There is a selected and non-selected version of every clut. Dividing by two puts
|
||
|
// labelNumber into the range 0-7.
|
||
|
|
||
|
source = theGlobals->originals[sourceNumber]; // get a handle to the source clut
|
||
|
theList = theGlobals->indexLists[sourceNumber]; // get a handle to the list of indices to protect
|
||
|
size = myGetHandleSize((Handle)source); // get the size to reallocate the purged clut
|
||
|
clutSize = (*source)->ctSize; // get the number of entries in the clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
ReallocHandle((Handle)theClut, size); // reallocate the clut
|
||
|
HPurge((Handle)theClut); // make clut purgable
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)(*source), (Ptr)(*theClut), size); // copy in the source clut
|
||
|
(*theClut)->ctSeed = theSeed; // restore its unique seed
|
||
|
listPtr = *theList; // dereference the index list handle
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// a CIcon's clut is copied and processed each time it is plotted (to each screen if on multiple monitors) Thus,
|
||
|
// the values used to determine the parameters used in processing are determined differently.
|
||
|
|
||
|
listPtr = NULL; // CIcon cluts are never checked with CheckColors so listPtr is irrelevant
|
||
|
clutSize = (*theClut)->ctSize; // theClut is already a copy so whatever we take whatever size it is
|
||
|
|
||
|
// For a CIcon, sourceNumber is used only to mean "Shall we process this clut in the 4-bit style (1) or the
|
||
|
// 8-bit style (0)"
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->screenDepth < 8)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 1;
|
||
|
blackEntry = FindBlack(theClut, clutSize);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
sourceNumber = 0;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there's a label get the RGBColor
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GetLabel(labelNumber, &labelColor, NULL);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're processing an 8-bit clut, we Brighten the color. We don't do it in four bits because there's very little
|
||
|
// hope of achieving the subtle color effects that we can in 8-bits. The labeling algorithm in 4-bits is different
|
||
|
// anyway and does not require the brightening process. (See Brighten above)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!sourceNumber)
|
||
|
Brighten(&labelColor);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
specList = (*theClut)->ctTable; // point to the beginning of the list of ColorSpecs in theClut
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Loop through all the clut entries, doing various kinds of color arithmetic to achieve the
|
||
|
// transformed clut effects.
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (entryNo = 0; entryNo <= clutSize; ++entryNo)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// we only do labeling and selection processing on clut entries in the index list. That way,
|
||
|
// an icon designer could decide to use some colors for detail outside this list and not have
|
||
|
// them labeled or selected. Thus, if we have a listPtr, we check if this entry is in the list
|
||
|
// before processing. We process all colors otherwise (for CIcons).
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((!listPtr) || (entryNo == *listPtr))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// If we have a listPtr, increment it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (listPtr)
|
||
|
++listPtr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor = specList->rgb; // make a copy of the color to process
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is a label color, apply it to this clut entry.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if the clut is 4-bit, set the black entry of the clut to the label color.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, tint the entire clut to the brightened label color by multiplying
|
||
|
// each component of each color by the fractional strength of the corresponding
|
||
|
// component of the label color. The net effect of this process is to "filter"
|
||
|
// the clut entry through the label color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (sourceNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (entryNo == blackEntry)
|
||
|
aColor = labelColor;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (entryNo)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// multiplying the components together in this fashion has the effect of "filtering"
|
||
|
// the entry color through the label color.
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor.red = (aColor.red * (unsigned long)(labelColor.red)) >> 16;
|
||
|
aColor.green = (aColor.green * (unsigned long)(labelColor.green)) >> 16;
|
||
|
aColor.blue = (aColor.blue * (unsigned long)(labelColor.blue)) >> 16;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if possible, the white entry has to be "brighter" than any other color, so instead of
|
||
|
// multiplying white by the label color (which would simply produce the label color),
|
||
|
// we bias the label color toward white and use that.
|
||
|
|
||
|
aColor.red = ((unsigned long)(aColor.red) + labelColor.red) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.green = ((unsigned long)(aColor.green) + labelColor.green) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.blue = ((unsigned long)(aColor.blue) + labelColor.blue) >> 1;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If this clut is for a selected icon, we apply the darkening algorithm to every affected entry
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
Darken(&aColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
specList->rgb = aColor; // record the processed color
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
specList->value |= 4; // If this color is not in the protected list, we set the inhibit bit which causes
|
||
|
// CheckColors to ignore this entry.
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the transform is ttDisabled, we average the color with white. This has the affect of "bleaching" the color,
|
||
|
// making it seem "grayed" in the same sense that disabled text is shown.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
aColor = specList->rgb;
|
||
|
aColor.red = ((unsigned long)(aColor.red) + 0xffff) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.green = ((unsigned long)(aColor.green) + 0xffff) >> 1;
|
||
|
aColor.blue = ((unsigned long)(aColor.blue) + 0xffff) >> 1;
|
||
|
specList->rgb = aColor;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
++specList; // Get the next entry in the clut
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// GetDeviceCheck is called by IconGetClut to get the DeviceCheck structure corresponding to theDevice.
|
||
|
// The DeviceCheck structure is used to cache information about which cluts have been checked against
|
||
|
// a certain GDevice's available colors.
|
||
|
//
|
||
|
// A little background: CheckColors is a palette manager routine that takes a CTabHandle, a GDevice and some
|
||
|
// tolerance values and returns a boolean, indicating whether the clut's colors can be represented on that device
|
||
|
// to the specified tolerance. To avoid calling CheckColors every time we plot, we cache the results of the
|
||
|
// check in a list of structures stored at the end of our ExpandMem globals. There is one structure for every
|
||
|
// GDevice in the DeviceList. Each structure contains a GDHandle to the corresponding device, the seed of the
|
||
|
// device's color table at the time of the last check and two 64-bit bit-maps, each corresponding to the 64
|
||
|
// different cluts used in plotting color icons. One of the bit-maps indicates whether the clut has been
|
||
|
// checked. The other bit-map indicates the result (good or bad) of the check. Before a clut is returned by
|
||
|
// IconGetClut, the DeviceCheck for the given GDevice is consulted to see if the clut has already been checked
|
||
|
// for that device, and if so, what the result was. If the clut has never before been checked, CheckColors
|
||
|
// is called, the DeviceCheck structure is updated to indicate that the clut has been checked and the
|
||
|
// result is cached.
|
||
|
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *GetDeviceCheck(GDHandle theDevice, GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *theCheck = &(theGlobals->deviceCheckList[0]); // prime the pointer to the beginning of deviceCheckList
|
||
|
long listSize = theGlobals->deviceListSize,
|
||
|
theSeed = (*((*((*theDevice)->gdPMap))->pmTable))->ctSeed; // Get the device's ColorTable's seed
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Loop through all the DeviceCheck structures in the list, looking for the one corresponding to theDevice
|
||
|
|
||
|
do {
|
||
|
if (theCheck->theDevice == theDevice)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// if we find a device, check if its seed has changed since the last check we did. If it has, none of
|
||
|
// the cached check values are valid, so we invalidate the cache and update theSeed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theCheck->theSeed != theSeed)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theCheck->theSeed = theSeed;
|
||
|
theCheck->checkMask = 0L;
|
||
|
theCheck->disabledCheckMask = 0L;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return theCheck;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
--listSize;
|
||
|
++theCheck;
|
||
|
} while (listSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define iconMaxTol 0x4000
|
||
|
#define iconMaxAveTol 0x2000
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CheckClut takes a parameter block and calls CheckColors on theClut. If theClut is purged,
|
||
|
// we rebuild it first. (NOTE: I don't know why this routine returns a long. Should be a Boolean)
|
||
|
|
||
|
long CheckClut(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (!(*(theBlock->theClut)))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// IconGetClut assumes that our ExpandMem block won't move. Since MakeClut can move memory, we lock
|
||
|
// down our global block before calling and unlock afterward.
|
||
|
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataHandle GlobalDataHandle = GetGlobalHandle();
|
||
|
|
||
|
HLock((Handle)GlobalDataHandle);
|
||
|
MakeClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
HUnlock((Handle)GlobalDataHandle);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the tolerances used here mean that any given color can be represented if the device has a
|
||
|
// color within 25% of it. The average tolerance of all colors in the clut must be within
|
||
|
// 12.5%. These values are empirically derived, but otherwise arbitrary.
|
||
|
|
||
|
return CheckColors(theBlock->theDevice, theBlock->theClut, iconMaxTol, iconMaxAveTol);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// IconGetClut gets the clut that should be used to plot an icon described by theBlock using data
|
||
|
// of the theDepth depth. On entry, theBlock has theDevice, theTransform, selected and theLabel
|
||
|
// fields set up. On exit, theBlock has theClut and clutNumber set up. IconGetClut returns false if
|
||
|
// the clut for the icon plotted to theDepth does not pass the CheckColors test for the given
|
||
|
// device. (See GetDeviceCheck above). The basic procedure for finding the clut is to generate
|
||
|
// an index into the array of cluts in the ExpandMem globals from the information in theBlock and
|
||
|
// theDepth. The clut is then checked, using the cached information in the deviceCheckList (See
|
||
|
// GetDeviceCheck above) or CheckClut (see above) if necessary. If the clut passes the test we
|
||
|
// return true, otherwise we return false. (NOTE: again this function should return a boolean
|
||
|
// in stead of a long)
|
||
|
|
||
|
long IconGetClut(ParamBlock *theBlock, short theDepth)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
short clutNumber; // index into clut array
|
||
|
unsigned long clutMask,
|
||
|
*theCheckMap,
|
||
|
*theResult;
|
||
|
DeviceCheck *theCheck;
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice = theBlock->theDevice;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if we are not on a gray-scale monitor, clutNumber is set to twice the label number (because
|
||
|
// there are two cluts for each label, selected and not selected). No labeling is attempted
|
||
|
// on a gray-scale monitor.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((theDevice && (!((*theDevice)->gdFlags & 0x1))))
|
||
|
clutNumber = 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
clutNumber = theBlock->theLabel << 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Even numbered cluts are unselected, odd numbered cluts are selected.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->selected)
|
||
|
++clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The second half of the array contains transformed cluts
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->theTransform == ttDisabled)
|
||
|
clutNumber += ((Labels * Sets) >> 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// the 4-bit cluts follow the 8-bit cluts in the transformed and untransformed groups
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theDepth < 8)
|
||
|
clutNumber += (Labels << 1);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get the clut and record it and its index in theBlock.
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = theGlobals->colorTables[clutNumber];
|
||
|
theBlock->clutNumber = clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theDevice will be NULL if we are plotting to a printer or to pict. If so,
|
||
|
// we don't do any checks.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!theDevice)
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// We get the DeviceCheck structure corresponding to the device we're checking. If GetDeviceCheck
|
||
|
// returns NULL, it means that the caller is plotting to an off-screen GDevice (which is OK and will
|
||
|
// work). We won't have any information cached for such a device so we call CheckClut immediately.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theCheck = GetDeviceCheck(theDevice, theGlobals))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// get clutNumber into the 0-31 range and set theCheckMap and theResult to either the disabled
|
||
|
// or non-disabled check bit-maps (See GetDeviceCheck above for a general description of
|
||
|
// of these bit-maps)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (clutNumber >= ((Labels * Sets) >> 1))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
clutNumber -= ((Labels * Sets) >> 1);
|
||
|
theCheckMap = &(theCheck->disabledCheckMask);
|
||
|
theResult = &(theCheck->disabledCheckResults);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theCheckMap = &(theCheck->checkMask);
|
||
|
theResult = &(theCheck->checkResults);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// create a one-bit mask to check against the bit-maps
|
||
|
|
||
|
clutMask = 1 << clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the clut has never been checked against this device, update theCheckMap, call CheckClut
|
||
|
// and record the result.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!((*theCheckMap) & clutMask))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
(*theCheckMap) |= clutMask;
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (CheckClut(theBlock))
|
||
|
(*theResult) |= clutMask;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
(*theResult) &= ~clutMask;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the result of the check was that this clut cannot be well-represented on this device,
|
||
|
// return false
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!((*theResult) & clutMask))
|
||
|
return false;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return CheckClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return true;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __GetLabel is used to get information about the system labels. It is called by the
|
||
|
// trap dispatcher to implement the public GetLabel call. labelNumber specifies which
|
||
|
// label we are querying. labelColor and labelString are buffers into which store the
|
||
|
// label's RGB value and text, respectively. Either labelColor or labelString can be
|
||
|
// NULL to indicate that no information is required about the color or the text.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __GetLabel(short labelNumber, RGBColor *labelColor,
|
||
|
Str255 labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if labelNumber is out of range we return an error
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((labelNumber < 0) || (labelNumber > 7))
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get a pointer to the global parameter block hanging off of ExpandMem
|
||
|
|
||
|
theGlobals = GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we don't have color QuickDraw, the global parameter block will not
|
||
|
// contain any label color information. (Should this return an error?)
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor && HaveCQD())
|
||
|
*labelColor = theGlobals->labelColors[labelNumber];
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
Handle aHandle = theGlobals->labelStrings[labelNumber];
|
||
|
LoadResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (ResErr)
|
||
|
return ResErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)(*aHandle), (Ptr)labelString, (long)(**aHandle) + 1);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// InvalLabelCluts is called by SetLabel to purge all the icon-plotting cluts associated with a
|
||
|
// label whose color has been changed
|
||
|
|
||
|
#define EightBitNonSelected 0
|
||
|
#define EightBitSelected 1
|
||
|
#define FourBitNonSelected (Labels * 2)
|
||
|
#define FourBitSelected (FourBitNonSelected + 1)
|
||
|
#define DisabledEightBitNonSelected ((Labels * Sets) / 2)
|
||
|
#define DisabledEightBitSelected (DisabledEightBitNonSelected + 1)
|
||
|
#define DisabledFourBitNonSelected (DisabledEightBitNonSelected + (Labels * 2))
|
||
|
#define DisabledFourBitSelected (DisabledFourBitNonSelected + 1)
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void InvalLabelCluts(short labelNumber)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataHandle GlobalDataHandle = GetGlobalHandle();
|
||
|
CTabHandle *clutPtr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
HLock((Handle)GlobalDataHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Get a pointer to the unselected, non-disabled, 8-bit CTabHandle for this label in the
|
||
|
// global array of icon-plotting cluts and purge it.
|
||
|
clutPtr = &((*GlobalDataHandle)->colorTables[labelNumber << 1]);
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*clutPtr + EightBitNonSelected));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 8-bit, selected clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + EightBitSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit non-selected clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + FourBitNonSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit selected clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + FourBitSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 8-bit, non-selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledEightBitNonSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 8-bit, selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledEightBitSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit, non-selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledFourBitNonSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// purge the 4-bit, selected, disabled clut
|
||
|
EmptyHandle((Handle)(*(clutPtr + DisabledFourBitSelected)));
|
||
|
|
||
|
HUnlock((Handle)GlobalDataHandle);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __SetLabel is used to get information about the system labels. It is called through the
|
||
|
// trap dispatcher to implement the GetLabel call, which is exported but private. labelNumber
|
||
|
// specifies which label we are modifying. labelColor and labelString are buffers containing the
|
||
|
// label's RGB value and text, respectively. Either labelColor or labelString can be
|
||
|
// NULL to indicate that the color or text is not to be changed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __SetLabel(short labelNumber, RGBColor *labelColor,
|
||
|
Str255 labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals;
|
||
|
Handle aHandle;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If the labelNumber is out of range, return a paramErr. Note that the range of valid
|
||
|
// label numbers is different for __SetLabel than for __GetLabel. Label 0 cannot be
|
||
|
// changed and is always black with text "None".
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((labelNumber < 1) || (labelNumber > 7))
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If labelColor is specified and the global data structure contains color information,
|
||
|
// set the label value.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelColor && HaveCQD())
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// Update the list of label colors in memory
|
||
|
|
||
|
theGlobals = GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
theGlobals->labelColors[labelNumber] = *labelColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Update the label color in the system file
|
||
|
|
||
|
aHandle = GetResource('rgb ', labelColorBase + labelNumber);
|
||
|
*((RGBColor *)(*aHandle)) = *labelColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
HNoPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
ChangedResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
WriteResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
HPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Invalidate cluts associated with labelNumber
|
||
|
InvalLabelCluts(labelNumber);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is a label string to set…
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (labelString)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
unsigned char size = *labelString + 1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if the string is larger than a Str32, truncate it
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (size > 32)
|
||
|
size = 32;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// update the string in memory.
|
||
|
|
||
|
theGlobals = GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
aHandle = theGlobals->labelStrings[labelNumber];
|
||
|
LoadResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)labelString, *aHandle, (long)size);
|
||
|
**aHandle = size-1;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// update the system file
|
||
|
|
||
|
HNoPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
ChangedResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
WriteResource(aHandle);
|
||
|
HPurge(aHandle);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
UpdateResFile(0);
|
||
|
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// These two routines are used as call-backs for PlotIconGeneric to implement
|
||
|
// PlotIconHandle, PlotSICNHandle
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromICON(long data, IconType theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if (theIcon == largeIcon1)
|
||
|
return ((Handle)data);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
Handle FromSICN(long data, IconType theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
if ((theIcon == smallIcon1) || (theIcon == miniIcon1))
|
||
|
return ((Handle)data);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
return NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// These two routines are called through the trap dispatcher to implement the public
|
||
|
// calls PlotIconHandle and PlotSICNHandle. NOTE: It was my intention to move these
|
||
|
// and their respective call-backs to IconUtils.a for speed and size efficiency.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __PlotIconHandle(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
Handle theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
return PlotIconGeneric(theRect, align, transform, (long)theIcon, FromICON, false);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __PlotSICNHandle(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
Handle theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
return PlotIconGeneric(theRect, align, transform, (long)theIcon, FromSICN, false);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// The QuickDraw.h definition of a CIcon includes a one-byte array at the end as a place-holder
|
||
|
// for the variable-sized mask data. This is a CIcon definition that includes only the fixed-size
|
||
|
// data for a sizeof() operator.
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
PixMap iconPMap; /*the icon's pixMap*/
|
||
|
BitMap iconMask; /*the icon's mask*/
|
||
|
BitMap iconBMap; /*the icon's bitMap*/
|
||
|
Handle iconData; /*the icon's data*/
|
||
|
} myCIcon;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// SetupParamBlockForCIcon initializes a parameter block for a true CIcon. It is called by
|
||
|
// __PlotCIconHandle after the theBlock has its theRect, userProc, theTransform, theLabel
|
||
|
// selected and dontDraw fields initialized. On exit theBlock is setup to be called by
|
||
|
// PlotTheCIcon (See below).
|
||
|
|
||
|
void SetupParamBlockForCIcon(ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// the userProc field is used to hold a pointer to the locked CIcon structure
|
||
|
CIconPtr iconPtr = (CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc);
|
||
|
|
||
|
short height = iconPtr->iconMask.bounds.bottom - iconPtr->iconMask.bounds.top;
|
||
|
unsigned long maskDataSize = (iconPtr->iconMask.rowBytes * height);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// oneBitImageHandle is a Handle which we will set up to take the place of the one-bit
|
||
|
// member of an icon suite. We will be setting up maskMap to point to the mask data
|
||
|
// within the CIcon itself, so we only need to make oneBitImageHandle as big as the
|
||
|
// one-bit image data.
|
||
|
Handle oneBitImageHandle = NewHandle(maskDataSize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// theOneBitData points to the one-bit data (one-bit image and mask) for this CIcon.
|
||
|
// oneBitPtr is the beginning of the one-bit image data. It is initialized to theOneBitData
|
||
|
// because it is legal to omit the one-bit image data from a CIcon, in which case we use
|
||
|
// the mask as the one-bit data.
|
||
|
unsigned char *theOneBitData = (unsigned char *)(iconPtr->iconMaskData),
|
||
|
*oneBitPtr = theOneBitData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
RgnHandle maskRgn = NewRgn();
|
||
|
GrafPtr curPort = myGetPort();
|
||
|
|
||
|
HLock(oneBitImageHandle);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If there is one bit-data, we point oneBitPtr to it. Otherwise, we leave it pointing
|
||
|
// to the mask data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock->userData > (sizeof(myCIcon) + maskDataSize))
|
||
|
oneBitPtr += maskDataSize;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy the one-bit image data to the simulated one-bit suite entry and point the theMask
|
||
|
// field in the paramBlock to point at it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)oneBitPtr, *oneBitImageHandle, maskDataSize);
|
||
|
theBlock->theMask = oneBitImageHandle;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy the bounds and rowBytes information from the CIcon's iconMask into theBlock->maskMap
|
||
|
// and point the baseAddr field to the mask data within the CIcon
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)(&(iconPtr->iconMask)), (Ptr)(&(theBlock->maskMap)), sizeof(BitMap));
|
||
|
theBlock->maskMap.baseAddr = (Ptr)theOneBitData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy all the PixMap information from the CIcon into the PixMap within theBlock and set
|
||
|
// the theData field to point to the color data from the CIcon.
|
||
|
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)(&(iconPtr->iconPMap)), (Ptr)(&(theBlock->dataMap)), sizeof(PixMap));
|
||
|
theBlock->theData = iconPtr->iconData;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// We use BitMapToRegion to generate the mask region used in doing transforms, etc.
|
||
|
// From this region we also derive our boundary information. userData is overloaded for
|
||
|
// CIcons to contain the handle to the mask region, since unlike icon suites, this region
|
||
|
// is generated once as opposed to when needed.
|
||
|
|
||
|
BitMapToRegion(maskRgn, &(theBlock->maskMap));
|
||
|
theBlock->boundary = (*maskRgn)->rgnBBox;
|
||
|
theBlock->userData = (long)maskRgn;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Initialize miscelaneous fields for plotting
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->onScreen = ((PrintVars == -1) && (!(curPort->picSave)));
|
||
|
theBlock->dstMap = &(curPort->portBits);
|
||
|
theBlock->dataMap.pixelSize = 0;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
theBlock->rowBytes = theBlock->maskMap.rowBytes;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->useRegions = true; // we don't have any choice with CIcon's
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// myColorTable is a ColorTable with only the fixed-sized portion for a sizeof() operator
|
||
|
|
||
|
typedef struct
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long ctSeed; /*unique identifier for table*/
|
||
|
short ctFlags; /*high bit: 0 = PixMap; 1 = device*/
|
||
|
short ctSize; /*number of entries in CTTable*/
|
||
|
} myColorTable;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CopyClut is called by GetCIconClut to create a clut that is the same as input clut but
|
||
|
// padded to the depth of the pixMap data to which it belongs. Thus a 5-entry clut for a
|
||
|
// 4-bit data pixMap would be padded to 16 entries. If a clut needs padding, the entries
|
||
|
// not specified are set to a ramp between white and black. This is to simulate the fact
|
||
|
// that relative colors in a CIcon are assigned to a ramp between foreGround and backGround.
|
||
|
// Since we always set foreGround to black and backGround to white, this will have the desired effect.
|
||
|
|
||
|
CTabHandle CopyClut(CTabHandle theClut, short depth)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long specArraySize = sizeof(ColorSpec) << depth; // size of the CSpecArray in new clut
|
||
|
CTabHandle theNewClut = (CTabHandle)NewHandle(sizeof(myColorTable) + specArraySize);
|
||
|
CTabPtr oldClutPtr = *theClut,
|
||
|
newClutPtr = *theNewClut;
|
||
|
short newClutEntries = (1 << depth) - 1, // ctSize of new clut
|
||
|
oldClutEntries = oldClutPtr->ctSize; // ctSize of old clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
newClutPtr->ctSeed = GetCTSeed(); // get unique seed
|
||
|
newClutPtr->ctSize = newClutEntries; // initialize ctSize entry
|
||
|
newClutPtr->ctFlags = oldClutPtr->ctFlags; // copy flags from old clut to new
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy common data between the two cluts (yeah, and some garbage as well)
|
||
|
BlockMove((Ptr)(oldClutPtr->ctTable), (Ptr)(newClutPtr->ctTable), specArraySize);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if there is no difference in CSpecArray size, we are done now.
|
||
|
if (newClutEntries > oldClutEntries)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec tempColor,
|
||
|
*theTable = newClutPtr->ctTable;
|
||
|
|
||
|
*((long *)(&(tempColor.rgb))) = 0; // set the last entry to black
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.blue = 0;
|
||
|
tempColor.value = newClutEntries;
|
||
|
theTable[newClutEntries] = tempColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
++oldClutEntries; // we are now looking one entry beyond the
|
||
|
// last entry in the old clut
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (newClutEntries > oldClutEntries) // Is there more than one extra spot to fill?
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
long index;
|
||
|
unsigned short increment = 0xffff / (newClutEntries - oldClutEntries),
|
||
|
value = 0;
|
||
|
|
||
|
*((long *)(&(tempColor.rgb))) = -1; // set entry after the last specified to white
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.blue = 0xffff;
|
||
|
tempColor.value = oldClutEntries;
|
||
|
theTable[oldClutEntries] = tempColor;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// fill all intermediate entries with an evenly spaced ramp from white to black
|
||
|
|
||
|
for (index = newClutEntries - 1; index > oldClutEntries; --index)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
value += increment;
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.red = value;
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.green = value;
|
||
|
tempColor.rgb.blue = value;
|
||
|
tempColor.value = index;
|
||
|
theTable[index] = tempColor;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
return theNewClut;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// This is the CIcon couterpart to IconGetClut. It is called by PlotTheCIcon (Below) to get
|
||
|
// the appropriate clut to use for plotting to deep devices.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void GetCIconClut(ParamBlock *theBlock, GDHandle theDevice, short flags)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
CTabHandle theClut = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.pmTable;
|
||
|
short clutDepth = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.pixelSize,
|
||
|
clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// copy the CIcon's clut and pad if necessary
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = CopyClut(theClut, clutDepth);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// clutNumber is either set to the label number or zero if we're on a gray-scale device.
|
||
|
// MakeClut (See above) uses this value differently for CIcons than for icon suites
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theDevice && (!(flags & 0x1)))
|
||
|
clutNumber = 0;
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
clutNumber = theBlock->theLabel;
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock->clutNumber = clutNumber;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// process the copied clut appropriately for our device, transform and label
|
||
|
|
||
|
MakeClut(theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// PlotTheCIcon is called directly by __PlotCIconHandle (Below) or indirectly via DeviceLoop.
|
||
|
// It is responsible for deciding whether the color icon data will be plotted or the one-bit data.
|
||
|
// When PlotTheCIcon is called from DeviceLoop, we make use of DeviceLoop's setting up of visRgn to
|
||
|
// clip the image appropriately. (In PlotTheIcon, we do our own clipping and only use DeviceLoop
|
||
|
// to iterate through the active devices.)
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal void PlotTheCIcon(short screenDepth,
|
||
|
short flags,
|
||
|
GDHandle theDevice,
|
||
|
ParamBlock *theBlock)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->screenDepth = screenDepth;
|
||
|
theBlock->theDevice = theDevice;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// if our monitor is deeper than four bits, or if our monitor is four bits and our icon is
|
||
|
// not selected or disabled, then we can plot the deep data. Otherwise we plot the one-bit
|
||
|
// data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (((screenDepth > 4) && (theBlock->theTransform != ttOpen)) ||
|
||
|
((screenDepth == 4) && (!(theBlock->selected)) && (!(theBlock->theTransform & ttDisabled))))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = ((CIconPtr)(theBlock->userProc))->iconPMap.pixelSize; // set up dataDepth for PlotDeep
|
||
|
GetCIconClut(theBlock, theDevice, flags); // get a processed copy of the clut
|
||
|
PlotDeep(theBlock); // plot the icon
|
||
|
DisposHandle((Handle)(theBlock->theClut)); // dispose of our copy of the clut
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
theBlock->dataDepth = 1;
|
||
|
theBlock->theClut = NULL;
|
||
|
PlotShallow(theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// __PlotCIconHandle is called through the trap dispatcher to implement the PlotCIconHandle call. It allows
|
||
|
// a CIcon to be plotted, using the modifiers for an icon suite.
|
||
|
|
||
|
pascal OSErr __PlotCIconHandle(const Rect *theRect,
|
||
|
short align,
|
||
|
short transform,
|
||
|
CIconHandle theIcon)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ParamBlock theBlock;
|
||
|
char iconState;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// CIcon's don't exist on non-color machines.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (!HaveCQD())
|
||
|
return paramErr;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Since PlotCIconHandle is slower than PlotCIcon, we fall through to PlotCIcon when there is no alignment
|
||
|
// or transform. For visual consistancy, we set fore and back colors to black and white, because PlotDeep
|
||
|
// (See above) does that before plotting deep data.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if ((!align) && (!transform))
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
ColorSpec foreGround,
|
||
|
backGround;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SaveFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
SaveBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
|
||
|
ForeColor(blackColor);
|
||
|
BackColor(whiteColor);
|
||
|
|
||
|
PlotCIcon(theRect, theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
RestoreFore(&foreGround);
|
||
|
RestoreBack(&backGround);
|
||
|
return noErr;
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
// Lock down the CIcon while we plot it.
|
||
|
|
||
|
iconState = HGetState((Handle)theIcon);
|
||
|
HLock((Handle)theIcon);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// set up for call to SetupParamBlockForCIcon
|
||
|
|
||
|
theBlock.theGroup = aCIcon;
|
||
|
theBlock.userData = myGetHandleSize((Handle)theIcon); // Going into SetupParamBlockForCIcon, userData is the size of theIcon,
|
||
|
// coming out, it is the mask region.
|
||
|
theBlock.theRect = *theRect;
|
||
|
theBlock.userProc = (IconRetriever)(*theIcon);
|
||
|
theBlock.theTransform = transform & transformMask;
|
||
|
theBlock.theLabel = (transform & labelMask) >> labelShift;
|
||
|
theBlock.selected = transform & ttSelected;
|
||
|
theBlock.dontDraw = false;
|
||
|
|
||
|
SetupParamBlockForCIcon(&theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// do alignment, if any
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (align)
|
||
|
PerformAlignment(&theBlock, align);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// map the region to the size of the destination rect
|
||
|
|
||
|
AdjustRgn((RgnHandle)(theBlock.userData),
|
||
|
&(theBlock.maskMap.bounds),
|
||
|
&(theBlock.theRect));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're plotting to a BitMap as opposed to a PixMap, we call PlotTheCIcon directly with a depth of 1.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, we need to to decide more carefully how to plot.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock.dstMap->rowBytes < 0)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
// If we're plotting to a printer or a PICT, we call PlotTheCIcon directly with with maximum depth.
|
||
|
// Otherwise, we do more checks.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theBlock.onScreen)
|
||
|
{
|
||
|
GlobalIconDataPtr theGlobals = GetGlobalPtr();
|
||
|
GDHandle theScreen;
|
||
|
|
||
|
// If we're assuming we're plotting to a given monitor, we call PlotTheCIcon directly for that
|
||
|
// monitor. Otherwise, we call DeviceLoop and let PlotTheCIcon decide for itself how to plot
|
||
|
// the data on monitor-by-monitor basis.
|
||
|
|
||
|
if (theScreen = theGlobals->virtualScreen)
|
||
|
PlotTheCIcon((*((*theScreen)->gdPMap))->pixelSize, 0, theScreen, &theBlock);
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
DeviceLoop((RgnHandle)(theBlock.userData),
|
||
|
(DeviceLoopDrawingProcPtr)PlotTheCIcon,
|
||
|
(long)(&theBlock), 0);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotTheCIcon(8, 0, NULL, &theBlock);
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
else
|
||
|
PlotTheCIcon(1, 1, NULL, &theBlock);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// restore the handle state of the CIconHandle
|
||
|
|
||
|
HSetState((Handle)theIcon, iconState);
|
||
|
|
||
|
// dispose of the mask region
|
||
|
|
||
|
DisposeRgn((RgnHandle)(theBlock.userData));
|
||
|
|
||
|
// dispose of the one-bit data handle we created in SetupParamBlockForCIcon
|
||
|
|
||
|
DisposHandle((Handle)(theBlock.theMask));
|
||
|
}
|
||
|
|
||
|
#endif
|